Structural

• User Management
• Home
• Project Data
• Materials
• Inspection
• Structural
• Punch Lists
• Non-Conformance Report (NCR)
• Documentation

User Management

1.1 Login

To login into the cuteQM app,

1. Open your web browser.
2. Type the URL provided by your administrator, in the address bar of your web browser.

The login page appears.

3. In the login page, enter your user name and password in the respective boxes.

 Note: If you forgot your password, click “I can’t access my account”. You will be redirected into a new web page. Enter your username to receive your password. 

4. In the Module section, select Structural.
5. Click Login.

Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM app, the home page of the cuteQM app opens.

                                        Figure 1.1 Home page of cuteQM app

 Note: The user name you have entered, the project you have been assigned, and the module you have selected are displayed in the upper right corner of the home page.

1.2 Change Password

If you want to change your current password,

1. Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 1.1.

   A drop-down list opens with multiple options.

   

2. Click the Change Password option.

   The Change Password page opens.

   

   Note: Before changing your password read the conditions specified in the Change Password page.

3. In the Password box, enter your current password.
4. In the New Password box, enter your new password.
5. In the Confirm New Password box, enter your new password again.
6. Click Change Password.

Your password will be successfully changed.

1.3 Log Out

If you want to log out from the app,

1. Click your user name displayed on the quick access bar of the home page. See Fig 1.1.

   A drop-down list opens with multiple options.

2. Click Log out.

Your current session ends now. The home page appears.

Home

2.0 Home

The home menu in the cuteQM app used to view a dashboard and a switch board of a project. This menu helps you to change project and module.

2.1 Dashboard

The Dashboard tab in the Home menu displays graphs, charts, and tables, which helps you to monitor and track the summary reports of various inspection and welding progress in the structural module.

Note: The dashboard displayed on the app is linked to a database that allows the report to be constantly updated. 

2.2 Switch Board

The Switch Board tab in the Home menu show the consolidated view of various tabs listed in multiple menus in the menu bar.

Once you have successfully logged in into the cuteQM app, you can view the Home Page. In the Home Page, the menu bar appears with multiple menus, otherwise you can select the Switch Board tab to view all the menus.

To select the Switch Board tab,

1. Navigate to Home.

2. Click Switch Board.

   The Switch Board tab includes multiple options such as Project Data, Materials, Inspection, Structural, MCR, Punch List, and Documentation. 

   

2.3 Switch Project

The Switch Project tab in the Home menu helps you to add a new project/module and switch between various projects and modules added in the app.

2.3.1 Switch Between Various Projects and Modules 

1. Navigate to the Home menu.

2. Click Switch Project.

   The switch project window opens with a list of projects and modules that are already added in the web.

   

                                              Figure 2.1: Switch project window

3. If you want to switch between various projects and modules,

   1. 1. Select a project you want from multiple projects listed in the left side of the window.

         Once you have selected the project, a list of modules related to the project is displayed.

      2. Select a module you want from multiple modules listed in the right side of the window.

4. Click Select. 

2.3.2 Add a New Project 

If you want to add a new project, do the following

If you want to add a new project, you must have been assigned as an administrator or a power user otherwise you cannot add any new project.

1. Click New Skid/ Module. See Fig 2.1.

   The add project/module page opens with two options such as Projects and Skid/ Module.

   

                                                        Figure 2.2: Add project/module page

2.  Click Projects.

   The Projects page opens.

   

                                                                 Figure 5.3: Projects page

3. Click  (ADD button) in the upper side of the Projects page.

   A new window opens to add a new project.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   
   

   1. 1. In the Project Number box, enter the project number.

      2. In the Project Name box, enter a project name.

      3. In the End User box, select an end user from a drop-down list.

      4. In the Client box, select a client from a drop-down list.

      5. In the AI/ Third Party box, select an AI or a third party from a drop-down list.

         Note: If you want to add multiple third parties, add third parties by clicking  (Add TP button) in the Third party column of the Projects page. 

      6. In the Purchase Order (PO) Number box, enter the PO number.

      7. In the Manufacturer Job Code box, enter the manufacturer job code number.

      8. In the Client Project box, enter the client project code.

      9. In the Client Job Code box, enter the client job code.  

      10. In the Owner Project box, enter the owner project code.

      11. In the Owner Job Code box, enter the owner job code.

      12. In the Delivery Date box, choose the delivery date.

      13. In the Location box, enter the location detail.

      14. In the Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) Weld Length Limit box, enter the length limit of NDE welding.

      15. If you need an external qualified welder, click the check box provided with the External Qualified Welder

      16. In the Weld Repair Allowance box, enter the amount for weld repair.

4. Click Save.  

A new project is added successfully.

2.3.3 Edit Any project 

If you want to edit any existing project details from the list of projects in the Projects page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective project. See Fig 2.3.

   A new window opens to edit the project.

   

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box in the Projects page.

3. Click Save.

2.3.4 Delete Any project 

If you want to delete any specific project from the list of projects, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Projects page, See Fig 2.3.

1. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding project.

   You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete this row?”.

2. Click OK.

2.3.5 Export Projects List

You can export a list of projects in the pdf and excel formats.

1. If you want to export the projects list in the pdf format, click  (PDF button). See Fig 2.3.

   The project list will be downloaded in the pdf format.

2. If you want to export the projects list in the excel format, click  (Excel button).

   The project list will be downloaded in the excel format.

2.3.6 Add a New Module

If you want to add a new module, do the following

If you want to add a new module, you must have been assigned as an administrator or a power user otherwise you cannot add any new module.

1. Click New Skid/ Module. See Fig 2.1.

   The add project/module page opens with two options such as Projects and Skid/ Module. See Fig 2.2.

2. Click Skid/Module.

   The Skid/Module page opens.

   

                                                          Figure 2.4: Skid/Module page

3. Click  (ADD button) in the upper side of the Skid/Module page.

   The skid/module box opens to add a new module.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   1. 1. In the Master Project Name box, enter the master project name from a drop-down list.

      2. In the Skid/Module box, enter a module name.

      3. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added module.

      4. In the Report Prefix box, the report prefix will be entered automatically. If you want change, you can edit the report prefix.

      5. In the Piping Class box, enter the piping class name.

      6. In the Delivery Date box, choose the delivery date.

      7. In the Project Type box, select the type of project from a drop-down list.

      8. If you want to show this module in the cuteQMmobile app, click the check box provided with the Show in Apps option.

      9. In the Shift Start Time (24hr) box, enter the shift starting time.  

      10. In the Shift End Time (24hr) box, enter the shift ending time.

      11. In the Break Time (mins) box, enter the break time duration.

      12. If you want to enable the repair project flow option, select the check box provided with the Repair Project Flow column.

      13. If you want to enable the welder qualification restriction option, select the check box provided with the Welder Qualification Restriction column.

4.  Click Save.  

A new module is added successfully.

2.3.7 Add a Surveyor, a Client or Other Role for Any Module

If you want to add a surveyor, a client or other role for any added module,

1. Click a respective (Add icon) provided in the Add Surveyor/Client column.

   The Add Surveyor/Client/Others window opens.

   

2.  Click  (ADD button).

   A new window opens to enter the name and type of a role.

   

3.  In the Name box, enter the name of the person to whom you want to add a role.

4. In the Type box, select the type of role from a drop-down list.

5. Click Save.

2.3.7 Edit Any Module

If you want to edit any existing module details from the list of modules in the Skid/Module page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective module. See Fig 2.4.

   A new window opens to edit the module.

   

2.  Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box in the Skid/Module page.

3. Click Save.

2.3.8 Delete Any Module

If you want to delete any specific module from the list of modules, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Skid/Module page, See Fig 2.4.

1. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding module.

   You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete?”.

2. Click OK.

2.3.9 Export Modules List

You can export a list of modules added in the Skid/Module page in the pdf and excel formats.

1. If you want to export the modules list in the pdf format, click  (PDF button). See Fig 2.4.

   The modules list will be downloaded in the pdf format.

2. If you want to export the modules list in the excel format, click  (Excel button).

   The modules list will be downloaded in the excel format.

2.3.10 Close a Project 

If you want to close any project from the app, do the following

Make sure that once you have closed any project, you cannot even open or access the closed project.

1. Click Close Project in the Close Project column for the corresponding module and project type. See Fig 2.4.

   You receive a notification message “Are you sure want to close this project? You will not be able to access/reopen this project again”.

2.  Click OK to close the project.

Project Data

3.0 Project Data

The Project Data menu helps you to add the details of master data and personnel data when you started to do a project.  This menu explains all the basic works of structural master drawing, weld map drawing, cutting plan drawing and import joints.

The Project Data menu appears with two options such as Masters and Personnels. The Masters option helps you to add master data for the structural project. The Personnels option helps you to add the details of persons for example welders and inspectors, who are all involved in the structural project.

3.1 Area 

The Area tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the details of area. If you want to add any area, do the following,

1. Click Area in the Project Data menu. 

   The Area page opens.

   

                                                              Figure 3.1: Area page

3.1.1 Add an Area

If you want to add an area, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Area page. See Fig 3.1.

   A new window opens to add an area.

   

   Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2.  In the Area box, enter the name of an area.

3. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the added area.

4. In the Area No box, enter the area number.

5. Click Save.

   The area is successfully added.

3.1.2 Edit Any Area

 If you want to edit any existing area in the Area page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective area. See Fig 3.1.

   A new window opens to edit the area.

   

2.  Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

3.1.3 Delete Any Area

If you want to delete any specific area from the list of areas, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Area page, See Fig 3.1.

1. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding area.

   You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete?”.

2.  Click OK.

3.1.4 Export Areas List

You can export a list of areas added in the Area page in the pdf and excel formats.

1. If you want to export the areas list in the pdf format, click  (PDF button).  

   The list will be downloaded in the pdf format.

2. If you want to export the areas list in the excel format, click  (Excel button).

   The list will be downloaded in the excel format.

3.1.5 Filter Any Area

If you want to filter any area from the list of areas in the Area page, do the following,

1. Click  (FILTER button) located on the Area page. See Fig 5.1.

   Once you clicked the Filter button, the filter box opens for the Area, Abbreviation, and Area No columns. 

   

2. Enter relevant detail in the respective column’s filter box to filter any area.

3.1.6 Import Multiple Areas

If you want to import multiple areas together, do the following,

1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Area page. See Fig 3.1.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of multiple areas.

   

2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the area details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.1.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click  (Upload button) to export the areas that are included in the excel worksheet.  

The details of the areas in the worksheet will be displayed in the Area page.

3.2 Client Master Drawings

Master drawing is a layout drawing provided to explain about the material such as plate and beam, and the material’s parameters used in the structural project. The Client Master Drawings tab helps you to add the client master drawing details.

If you want to add any client master drawing details, do the following,

1. Click Client Master Drawings in the Project Data menu. 

   The Client Master Drawings page opens.

   

                                                 Figure 3.2 Client Master Drawings page

3.2.1 Add a Client Master Drawing

If you want to add a client master drawing, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Client Master Drawings page. See Fig 3.2.

   A new window opens to add a client master drawing.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the Client Master Drawing No box, enter the client master drawing number.

3. In the Revision box, enter the revision number.

4. In the Level box, enter the level number of the client master drawing.

5. If you want to enable the full traceability option, click the check box provided with the Full Traceability? column.

6. In the Sub System box, select the system and sub system numbers from a drop-down list.

7. In the Issued Date box, select the issued date of the client master drawing.

8. In the Issued To box, select the purpose of issuing the client mater drawing.

9. In the Sheet Number box, enter the sheet number of the client master drawing.

   Note: The sheet number is nothing but a page number of the master drawing sheet. If the master drawing is provided in single sheet, the Sheet No should be 1 of 1. If the drawing is stretched to two pages, then the Sheet No should be 1 of 2 and 2 of 2.

10. In the Remarks/Description box, enter your remarks or description if any.

11. Click Save.

The client master drawing is successfully added.

3.2.2 Attach a File into a Client Master Drawing 

If you want to attach any file with any client master drawing listed in the Client Master Drawings page,

1. Click  (Attach icon) provided in the Attachment column for the respective client master drawing in the Client Master Drawings page.

   The File Upload (Client Master Drawings) page opens.

   

   Note: Before uploading any file, read the instructions given in the File Upload (Client Master Drawings) page.

2.  Click  (Browse button) to select a file to be uploaded.

3. Select any file which you want to upload, from your computer.

4. Click  (Upload button) to attach the file.

The uploaded file will be displayed in the File Upload table.

3.2.3 Edit Any Client Master Drawing

If you want to edit any existing client master drawing in the Client Master Drawings page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective client master drawing. See Fig 3.2.

   A new window opens to edit the client master drawing.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

3.2.4 Delete Any Client Master Drawing

If you want to delete any specific client master drawing from the list of client master drawings, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Client Master Drawings page, See Fig 6.2. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.2.5 Export Client Master Drawings List

You can export a list of client master drawings added in the Client Master Drawings page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.2.6 Filter Any Client Master Drawing

If you want to filter any client master drawing from the list of client master drawings in the Client Master Drawings page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

3.2.7 Import Multiple Client Master Drawings

If you want to import multiple client master drawings together, do the following,

1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Client Master Drawings See Fig 3.2.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of client master drawings.

   

2.  Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.
3. Once you have added the client master drawing details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.
4. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.2.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click (Upload button) to export the client master drawings that are included in the excel worksheet.  

The details of the client master drawings in the worksheet will be displayed in the Client Master Drawings page.

3.3 Master Drawings

The Master Drawings tab helps you to add the master drawing details. If you want to add any master drawing details, do the following,

1. Click Master Drawings in the Project Data menu. 

   The Master Drawings page opens.

   

                                                       Figure 3.3 Master Drawings page

3.3.1 Add a Master Drawing

If you want to add a master drawing, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Master Drawings page. See Fig 3.3.

   A new window opens to add a master drawing.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2.  In the Master Drawing No box, enter the master drawing number.

3. In the Client Master Drawing box, select the client master drawing from a drop-down list.

4. In the Revision box, enter the revision number.

5. In the Level box, enter the level number of the master drawing.

6. In the Area box, select an area from a drop-down list.

7. If you want to enable the full traceability option, click the check box provided with the Full Traceability? column.

8. In the Sheet Number box, enter the sheet number of the master drawing.

   Note: The sheet number is nothing but a page number of the master drawing sheet. If the master drawing is provided in single sheet, the Sheet No should be 1 of 1. If the drawing is stretched to two pages, then the Sheet No should be 1 of 2 and 2 of 2.

9.  In the Issued Date box, choose the issued date of the master drawing.

10. In the Remarks/Description box, enter your remarks or description if any.

11. In the Issued To box, select the purpose of issuing the master drawing, from a drop-down list.

12. Click Save.

The master drawing is successfully added.

3.3.2 Attach a File into a Master Drawing 

If you want to attach any file with any master drawing listed in the Master Drawings page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

3.3.3 Edit Any Master Drawing

 If you want to edit any existing master drawing in the Master Drawings page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective master drawing. See Fig 3.3.

   A new window opens to edit the master drawing.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

3.3.4 Delete Any Master Drawing

If you want to delete any specific master drawing from the list of master drawings, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Master Drawings page, See Fig 3.3.

1. Click  (Delete icon) for the corresponding master drawing.

   You receive a notification message “Do you want to delete?”.

2. Click OK.

   Note: If you receive a notification message “Delete failed! Please delete dependency records.”, you must delete the corresponding weld map drawing for the selected master drawing.

   

   To delete the corresponding weld map drawing,

3. Navigate to the Weld Map Drawings tab.

4. Find out the weld map drawing for the respective master drawing.

   Tip: one master drawing has either a single or multiple weld map drawing.

5. Delete the corresponding weld map drawings.

6. Navigate to the Master Drawing tab, and then repeat the steps 1 and 2 to delete the respective master drawing.

3.3.5 Export Master Drawings List

You can export a list of master drawings added in the Master Drawings page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.3.6 Filter Any Master Drawing

If you want to filter any master drawing from the list of master drawings in the Master Drawings page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

3.3.7 Import Multiple Master Drawings

You can import multiple master drawing details together by using a pre-defined excel template given in the application. If you want to import multiple master drawings together, do the following,

1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Master Drawings page. See Fig 3.3.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of master drawings.

   

2.  Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the master drawing details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.3.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

    
5. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click   (Upload button) to export the master drawings that are included in the excel worksheet.  

The details of the master drawings in the worksheet will be displayed in the Master Drawings page.

3.4 Weld Map Drawings

Weld map drawing is an isometric drawing that assists in identifying weld joints in the structural project. This drawing also shows areas that will be used for NDT once welding is completed. By using the weld map drawing, the welding cycle and lead times will be reduced accordingly.

If you want to add any weld map drawing details, do the following,

1. Click Weld Map Drawings in the Project Data menu.

   The Weld Map Drawings page opens.

   

                                                       Figure 3.4 Weld Map Drawings page

3.4.1 Add a Weld Map Drawing

If you want to add a weld map drawing, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Weld Map Drawings page. See Fig 3.4.

   A new window opens to add a weld map drawing.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the Master Drawing No box, select a master drawing number from a drop-down list.

3. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, enter the weld map drawing number.

4. In the Revision box, enter the revision number.

5. In the Drawing Prefix box, enter the drawing prefix.

6. In the Radiographic Testing (RT) Requirement (%) box, enter the required percentage of RT.
7. In the Ultrasonic Testing (UT) Requirement (%)box, enter the required percentage of UT.
8. In the Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) Requirement (%) box, enter the required percentage of MT.
9. In the Dye penetrant inspection(PT) Requirement (%) box, enter the required percentage of PT.

   The RT Requirement (%), UT Requirement (%), MT Requirement (%) and PT Requirement (%) should be filled with valid numerical numbers. The joint testing will be performed based on the value given by you for example, if you enter 100 % of requirement, which means 100 % of the joints will be tested. If you enter 0 %, none of joints will be tested.

10. If you want to do the magnetic particle inspection after load test, click the check box provided with the Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI) After Load Test?

11. If you want to do PT after test, click the check box provided with the PT After Test? option.

12. In the code option, select any one from American Welding Society (AWS) or American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) or BOTH.

13. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

14. In the Issued Date box, choose the issued date of the weld map drawing.

15. In the Issued To box, select the purpose of issuing the weld map drawing, from a drop-down list.

16. In the Description box, enter the description for the added weld map drawing.

17. Click Save.

The weld map drawing is successfully added.

3.4.2 Attach a File into a Weld Map Drawing 

If you want to attach any file with any weld map drawing listed in the Weld Map Drawings page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

3.4.3 Edit Any Weld Map Drawing

 If you want to edit any existing weld map drawing in the Weld Map Drawings page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective weld map drawing. See Fig 6.4.

   A new window opens to edit the weld map drawing.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

3.4.4 Delete Any Weld Map Drawing

If you want to delete any specific weld map drawing from the list of weld map drawings, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Weld Map Drawings page, See Fig 6.4. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.4.5 Export Weld Map Drawings List

You can export a list of weld map drawings added in the Weld Map Drawings page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.4.6 Filter Any Weld Map Drawing

If you want to filter any weld map drawing from the list of weld map drawings in the Weld Map Drawings page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

3.4.7 Import Multiple Weld Map Drawings

If you want to import multiple weld map drawings together, do the following,

1. Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Weld Map Drawings page. See Fig 3.4.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of weld map drawings.

   

2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the weld map drawing details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.4.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  
6.  Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click   (Upload button) to export the weld map drawings that are included in the excel worksheet.

The details of the weld map drawings in the worksheet will be displayed in the Weld Map Drawings page.

3.5 Sheet Number

The Sheet No tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the sheet number for a weld map drawing. The sheet number is nothing but a page number of the weld map drawing.

If the weld map drawing is provided in single sheet, the Sheet No should be 1 of 1. If the drawing is stretched to two pages, then the Sheet No should be 1 of 2 and 2 of 2.

If you want to add the sheet number, do the following,

1. Click Sheet No in the Project Data menu.

   The Sheet No page opens.

   

                                                              Figure 3.5 Sheet No page

3.5.1 Add a Sheet Number

If you want to add a sheet number, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Sheet No page. See Fig 3.5.

   A new window opens to add the sheet number for a weld map drawing.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, select the weld map drawing number from a drop-down list.

   Note: If you want to add the sheet number for any new weld map drawings. You must add the respective weld map drawing details by using the Weld Map Drawings tab.

3. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number of the weld map drawing.

4. Click Save.

The sheet number for the corresponding weld map drawing is successfully added.

3.5.2 Edit Any Sheet Number 

 If you want to edit any existing sheet number for the weld map drawing number in the Sheet No page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective weld map drawing number. See Fig 3.5.

   A new window opens to edit the sheet number for the weld map drawing number.

2. Click a box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

3.5.3 Delete Any Sheet Number

If you want to delete any specific sheet number of the weld map drawing number from the list of sheet numbers, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Sheet No page, See Fig 6.5. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.5.4 Export Sheet Number List

You can export a list of sheet numbers of the weld map drawing numbers added in the Sheet No page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.5.5 Filter Any Sheet Number

If you want to filter any sheet number from the list of sheet numbers in the Sheet No page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic ,”Filter Any Area”.

3.5.6 Import Multiple Sheet Numbers

If you want to import multiple sheet numbers together, do the following,

1. Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Sheet No page. See Fig 3.5.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of weld map drawing numbers including their sheet numbers.

   

2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the sheet number details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click   (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.5.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click  (Upload button) to export the sheet numbers that are included in the excel worksheet.

The details of the sheet numbers in the worksheet will be displayed in the Sheet No page.

3.6 Joints

In structural project, joints are the points where two or more pieces of materials for example pipes, are joined by welding. The Joints tab in the Project Data helps you add the joint details including joint number, welding type, and piece mark number.

If you want to add any joint details, do the following,

1. Click Joints in the Project Data menu. 

   The Joints page opens.

   

                                                           Figure 3.6 Joints page

3.6.1 Add a Joint

If you want to add a joint, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Joints page. See Fig 3.6.

   A new window opens to add a joint.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, enter the weld map drawing number.

3. In the Sheet Number box, select a sheet number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Joint Number box, select the joint number from a drop-down list.

   Note: If you want to enter the range for the joint number, click  and then enter the ranges in the From and To boxes, respectively.

5.  In the Weld Type box, select a weld type from a drop-down list.

6. In the Thickness Material 1 box, enter the thickness of the first material.

7. In the Thickness Material 2 box, enter the thickness of the second material.

8. In the Weld Length box, enter the length of welding.

9. In the Dia (INCH) box, enter the diameter of the joint.

10. In the Size box, enter the size of the welding.

11. In the Thickness box, enter the thickness of the welding.

12. In the Category box, select the category from a drop-down list.

13. In the Assembly Mark box, enter the assembly mark details.  

14. Select the NDT requirement from the following options such as RT Required, PT Required, MT Required, and UT Required.

15. Click Save.

The joint is successfully added.

3.6.2 Assign Piece Mark Number

If you want to assign the piece mark number for any joint number.

1. Click (Assign Piece Mark button) in the Joints page.

   The Joint Piece Mark window opens.

   

2. In the Joint No box, select the joint number from a drop-down list.

   Once you have selected the joint number, the piece mark numbers related with the selected joint number appear.

   

3. If you want to assign a new piece mark number for the selected joint number, in the Piece Mark No box, click and then select the piece mark number from a drop-down list.

   A new piece mark number will be listed along with the existing piece mark numbers.

   

4. Select the new piece mark number.

   Once you have selected the new piece mark number, the selected piece mark number is assigned to the respective joint number.

   Note: If you want to delete any piece mark number, select the respective piece mark and click  (Delete Piece Mark button). Once you have deleted the piece mark number, the joints related with this piece mark number will also be deleted.  

3.6.3 Edit Any Joint

 If you want to edit any existing joint in the Joints page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective joint. See Fig 3.6.

   A new window opens to edit the joint.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

3.6.4 Delete Any Joint

If you want to delete any specific joint from the list of joints, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Joins page, See Fig 6.6. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.6.5 Export Joints List

You can export a list of joints added in the Joints page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.6.6 Filter Any Joint 

If you want to filter any joint from the list of joints in the Joints page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

3.6.7 Import Multiple Joints

You can import multiple joint details together by using a pre-defined excel template given in the application. If you want to import multiple joints together, do the following,

1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Joints page. See Fig 3.6.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of joints.

   

2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the joint details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click   (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.6.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click   (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click   (Upload button) to export the joints that are included in the excel worksheet.

The details of the joints included in the worksheet will be displayed in the Joints page.

3.7 Cutting Plan Drawings

Cutting plan drawing is provided for each master drawing. Usually the Cutting Plan Drawing is prepared in AutoCAD. The drawing portion of the cutting plan drawing will be screen captured. A cutting plan drawing report is generated for sending to the clients.

If you want to add any cutting plan drawing details, do the following,

1. Click Cutting Plan Drawings in the Project Data menu.

   The Cutting Plan Drawings page opens.

   

                                              Figure 3.7 Cutting Plan Drawings page

    

3.7.1 Add a Cutting Plan Drawing

If you want to add a cutting plan drawing, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Cutting Plan Drawings page. See Fig 3.7.

   A new window opens to add a cutting plan drawing.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the Master Drawing No box, select a master drawing number from a drop-down list.

3. In the Drawing Prefix box, enter the drawing prefix.

4. In the Cutting Plan Drawing No box, enter a cutting plan drawing number.

5. In the Revision box, enter the revision number.

6. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

7. In the Issued Date box, choose the issued date of the cutting plan drawing.

8. In the Issued To box, select the purpose of issuing the cutting plan drawing, from a drop-down list.

9. In the Description box, enter the description for the added cutting plan drawing.

10. In the (Computer Numerical Control) CNC Program No box, enter the CNC program number.

11. In the Assembly Mark box, enter the assembly mark.  

12. Click Save.

The cutting plan drawing is successfully added.

3.7.2 Attach a File into a Cutting Plan Drawing 

If you want to attach any file with any cutting plan drawing listed in the Cutting Plan Drawings page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

3.7.3 Edit Any Cutting Plan Drawing

If you want to edit any existing cutting plan drawing in the Cutting Plan Drawings page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective cutting plan drawing. See Fig 3.7.

   A new window opens to edit the cutting plan drawing.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

3.7.4 Delete Any Cutting Plan Drawing

If you want to delete any specific cutting plan drawing from the list of cutting plan drawings, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Cutting Plan Drawings page, See Fig 6.7. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.7.5 Export Cutting Plan Drawings List

You can export a list of cutting plan drawings added in the Cutting Plan Drawings page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.7.6 Filter Any Cutting Plan Drawing

If you want to filter any cutting plan drawing from the list of cutting plan drawings in the Cutting Plan Drawings page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

3.7.7 Import Multiple Cutting Plan Drawings

If you want to import multiple cutting plan drawings together, do the following,

1. Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Cutting Plan Drawings See Fig 3.7.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of cutting plan drawings.

   

2.  Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the weld map drawing details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.7.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click   (Upload button) to export the cutting plan drawings that are included in the excel worksheet.

The details of the cutting plan drawings in the worksheet will be displayed in the Cutting Plan Drawings page.

3.8 Piece Mark number

The materials used in the Structural Project are cut into multiple pieces by using the cutting plan drawings, where each piece is provided with respective unique number also known as piece mark number. The piece mark number is manually added by a user, and mapped later with weld joints.

The Piece Mark Number tab in the Project Data helps you add the piece mark number details including cutting plan drawing number. If you want to add any piece mark number details, do the following,

1. Click Piece Mark Number in the Project Data menu.

   The Piece Mark Number page opens.

   

                                                   Figure 3.8 Piece Mark Number page

   The Master Drawing No box and Cutting Plan Drawing No boxes provided in the upper right-side of the Piece Mark Number page including a drop-down arrow to easily sort the specific master drawing number and cutting plan drawing number. See Fig 3.8.

3.8.1 Add a Piece Mark Number

If you want to add a piece mark number, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Piece Mark Number page. See Fig 3.8.

   A new window opens to add a piece mark number.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2.  In the Cutting Plan Drawing No box, select a cutting plan drawing number from a drop-down list.

3. In the Piece Mark No box, enter a piece mark number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Material Description box, select the material description from a drop-down list.

5. In the Material Specification box, select the material specification from a drop-down list.

6. In the Size/Thickness/Diameter box, enter the size/thickness/diameter of the material.

7. In the Width box, enter the width of the material.

8. In the Length box, enter the length of welding.

9. In the Material Grade 1 box, enter the grade 1 material details.

10. Click Save.

The piece mark number is successfully added.

3.8.2 Edit Any Piece Mark Number

If you want to edit any existing piece mark number in the Piece Mark Number page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective piece mark number. See Fig 3.8.

   A new window opens to edit the piece mark number.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

3.8.3 Delete Any Piece Mark Number

If you want to delete any specific piece mark number from the list of piece mark numbers, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Piece Mark Number page, See Fig 6.8. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.8.4 Export Piece Mark Numbers List

You can export a list of piece mark numbers added in the Piece Mark Number page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.8.5 Filter Any Piece Mark Number 

If you want to filter any piece mark number from the list of piece mark numbers in the Piece Mark Number page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

3.8.6 Import Multiple Piece Mark Numbers

You can import multiple piece mark numbers together by using a pre-defined template given in the application. If you want to import multiple piece mark numbers together, do the following,

1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Piece Mark Number See Fig 3.8.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of piece mark numbers.

   

2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the piece mark number details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click   (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.8.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5.  Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click   (Upload button) to export the piece mark numbers that are included in the excel worksheet.  

The details of the piece mark numbers included in the worksheet will be displayed in the Piece Mark Number page.

3.9 Import Joints

The Import Joints tab helps you to upload various data for different fields included in the Project Data menu instead of uploading data for each field individually.  If you want to import data for different fields, do the following,

1. Click the Import Joints tab in the Project Data menu.

   The Excel Import page opens.

   

    

2. Download a template by clicking “Click here to Download Sample Template” to enter the details of data.

   An excel worksheet will be downloaded.

   

    

3. Enter the relevant details in the respective column of the excel worksheet based on the columns listed in the Required Columns to Import field.

4. Click   (Choose File button).

   Once the file has been uploaded successfully, you receive a message, “Successfully uploaded”

5. Click (Get Columns button).

   The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field. The system automatically maps the Required Columns to Import field and the Excel Column field and displays in the Mapped Columns field.

   

6. If you want to map any columns or to u map any mapped columns, select the respective columns and then click (Map button) and (UnMap button) accordingly.

7. Once you have completed the mapping and un mapping of columns, in the Upload Range From and To fields, enter the range of rows you want to upload from the excel worksheet.

   Note: In the Total Rows field, the system indicates the total number of rows filled in the excel worksheet.

    Tip: You must enter the upload starting range as two in the Upload Range From field because a first row in the excel worksheet is having heading of the columns.

8. Click  (Populate Value button).

9. Click   (Process button).

   Once you have clicked the Process button, the system processes the columns and displays in the Excel Import page.

   

10. Click  (Import button) to import the data added in the excel worksheet.

3.10 Joints Bulk Edit

The Joints Bulk Edit tab in the Structural menu used to hide the specific joints, which are added using the Joints tab.

Once the joints have been hidden, the joints will not be available while adding any fit-up request.

If you want to hide any joints, do the following,

1. Click the Joints Bulk Edit tab.

   The Joints Bulk Update page opens with a list of added joints.

   

   The Joints Bulk Update page shows the weld map drawing number, sheet number, and piece mark number for the corresponding joint number.

2. If you want to hide any joints, select the checkbox of the respective joints, in the Hide Joint column of the Joints Bulk Update page.

3. Click Save Changes.  

The selected joints will be hidden.

3.11 Assign Unique/ WPS No

The Assign Unique/WPS No tab in the Project Data menu allows you to assign the unique and WPS numbers for the specific joint number, piece mark number, and weld map drawing number.

3.11.1 Assign Unique No

If you want to assign a unique number for any joint number, piece mark number, and weld map drawing number, do the following,

1. Click the Assign Unique/WPS No tab in the Project Data menu.

   The Assign Unique/WPS No page opens including a list of joint numbers, piece mark numbers, and weld map drawing numbers.

   

2. Click the Assign Unique No option.

   A list of unique numbers appears below the Assign Unique No option.

3. If you want to assign any unique number, select the respective unique number, and then select the respective check boxes of the joint numbers, piece mark numbers, and weld map drawing numbers provided in the Assign?

4. Click Save.

3.11.2 Assign WPS No

If you want to assign a WPS number for any joint number, piece mark number, and weld map drawing number, do the following,

1. Click the Assign WPS No option in the Assign Unique No/WPS No page.

   

   A list of unique numbers appears below the Assign WPS No option.

2. If you want to assign any WPS number, select the respective WPS number, and then select the respective check boxes of the joint numbers, piece mark numbers, and weld map drawing numbers provided in the Assign? column.

3. Click Save.

3.12 Clone Project

The Clone Project tab in the Project Data menu helps you to clone the items of any one project to another project. Once you have completed the project cloning, the items are copied into the selected project without need to uploading the items again. If you want to clone any project, do the following,

1. Click the Clone Project tab in the Project Data menu.

   The CLONE PROJECT page opens.

   

              Figure 3.12: Clone Project page

2.  In the From Project box, select a project from which you want to clone the items, from a drop-down list.

3. In the To Project box, select a project to which you want to clone the items, from a drop-down list.

4. In the Items to clone box, select the items you want to clone.

5. Click Clone. 

3.13 Welders in Projects

The Welders in Projects tab in the Project Data menu helps you to assign welders for a project. You can add a welder report by using this tab. This tab also helps you to view a welder list and WPQ details.

1. Click the Welders in Projects tab in the Project Data menu.

   The welders in projects page opens with four fields such as Welder Report, Assign Welder to Project, Welder List, and WPQ Details.

   

                                                  Figure 3.13: Welders in project page

3.13.1 Add a Welder Report

If you want to add a welder report, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Welder Report See Fig 3.13.

   A new window opens to add a welder report.

   

   Tip: A report number for a new welder report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of welder who has prepared the welder report.

3. In the Received By box, enter the name of welder who has received the welder report.

4. In the Approved By box, enter the name of welder who has approved the welder report.

5. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the welder report.

6. In the Received Date box, choose the received date of the welder report.

7. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the welder report.

8. Click Save.

The welder report is successfully added.

3.13.2 Export Welder Reports List

You can export a list of welder reports in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.13.3 Assign Welder to Project

The Assign Welder to Project field in the welders in projects page allows you to assign any welder to the project. If you want to assign any welder to the project, do the following,

1. In the All Welders box, if you want to view all the welders, click ALL otherwise select the respective company’s welder group from a drop-down list to view their welders list.

   Once you have selected the company’s welder group, the left-side box shows a list of welders. The right-side box shows a list of welders who has been already assigned for the project.

2. If you want to assign any welder for the project, select the respective welder in the left-side box, and then click  (Assign welder button).

   The selected welder will be assigned to the project.

3. If you want to reject any welder who has been assigned for the project, select the respective welder in the right-side box, and then click (Reject welder button).

3.13.4 Welder List

The Welder List field in the welders in projects page shows the welder details such as welder name, welder number, NRIC, date of birth, and nationality. This field also helps you to assign the WPQs of welders to the project, and remove any WPQs from the project.

If you click (Expand icon) of the respective welder, the All WPQ box shows the details of all WPQs of the welder, and the Assigned to Project box shows any WPQ that has been assigned to a project.

1. If you want to assign any WPQ for the project, select the respective WPQ in the All WPQ box, and then click (Assign WPQ button).

   The selected welder will be assigned to the project.

2. If you want to reject any WPQ that has been assigned for the project, select the respective WPQ in the Assigned to Project box, and then click  (Reject WPQ button).

3.13.5 WPQ details

The WPQ details field in the welders in projects page shows the WPQ details of each welder including welder’s name, welder number, welding process name, weld metal thickness, and position.

If you want to take a print of any WPQ details, click the checkbox provided in the Print Column.

3.14 Inspectors in Projects

The Inspectors in Projects tab in the Project Data menu helps you to map inspectors for the specific project.

1. Click the Inspectors in Projects tab.

   The Project Mapping – Inspectors page opens.

   

                                     Figure 3.14: Project Mapping – Inspectors page 

    

   The Project Mapping – Inspectors page shows a list of inspectors, which is added in the Master Data. If you want to map any inspectors for a specific project, do the following,

2. Select a project you want from the Projects box. 

   A list of available inspectors will be displayed.

3. Select the check box of the respective inspector which you want to map for the selected project.

   

4. Click   (Map icon).

   The selected inspectors are mapped for the selected project.

   

   The Inspector List window shows the inspector’s name, login name, NRIC, and Date of birth.

3.15 WPS by Projects

WPS is a written instruction that specifies materials, consumables and edge preparations for a given joint. The WPS lists the pre- and post-weld operations including heat treatments; machining, grinding, and dressing of the weld.

The WPS by Projects tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add a WPS report and assign the WPS to a project.

1. Click the WPS by Projects tab in the Project Data menu.

   The WPS by projects page opens with two fields such as WPS Summary and Assign WPS to Project.

   

                              Figure 3.15: WPS by projects page

3.15.1 Add a WPS Report

If you want to add a new WPS report, do the following,

1.  Click (ADD button) in the WPS Summary field. See Fig 3.15.

   A new window opens to add a WPS report.

   

   Tip: A report number for a new WPS report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.  

2. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the WPS report.

3. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the WPS report.

4. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the WPS report.

5. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the WPS report.  

6. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the WPS report.

7. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the WPS report.

8. Click Save.

The WPS report is successfully added.

3.15.2 Export WPS Reports List

You can export a list of added WPS reports in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.15.3 Assign WPS to Project

The Assign WPS to Project field in the WPS in projects page allows you to assign the WPS to the project. If you want to assign any WPS to the project, do the following,

In the Assign WPS to Project field, the All WPS box displays a list of available WPS. The WPS in Project box displays a list of WPS that has been already assigned for the project.

1. If you want to assign any WPS for the project, select the respective WPS in the ALL WPS box, and then click (Assign welder button).

   The selected WPS will be assigned to the project.

2. If you want to reject any WPS that has been assigned for the project, select the respective WPS in the WPS in Project box, and then click  (Reject welder button).

3.16 Master Equipment

The Master Equipment tab in the Project Data menu used to add a master equipment.

1. Click Master Equipment in the Project Data menu.

   The Master Equipment page opens.

   

                                               Figure 3.16: Master Equipment

3.16.1 Add a Master Equipment

If you want to add a master equipment,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Master Equipment page. See Fig 3.16.

   A new window opens to add a master equipment.

   

2.  In the Tag Number box, enter the tag number.

3. In the Description box, enter the description for the master equipment.

4. In the Sequence Number box, enter the sequence number.

5. In the Sub System box, select a sub system.

6. In the Area box, enter the area name.

7. In the Location box, enter the location name.

8. In the Vendor PID box, enter the vendor PID number.

9. In the Layout box, enter the layout detail.

10. In the Parent Tag box, enter the parent tag number.

11. In the PO Number box, enter the PO number.

12. In the Manufacturer box, enter the manufacturer name.

13. In the Supplier box, enter the supplier name.

14. In the Length box, enter the length of the master equipment.

15. In the Width box, enter the width of the master equipment.

16. In the Height box, enter the height of the master equipment.

17. In the Diameter box, enter the diameter of the master equipment.

18. In the Dry Weight box, enter the dry weight of the master equipment.

19. In the Operating Weight box, enter the operating weight of the master equipment.

20. In the Insulation Type box, enter the insulation type.

21. In the Serial Number box, enter the serial number.

22. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

23. In the Engineering Status box, enter the engineering status.

24. Click Save.

The master equipment is successfully added.

3.16.2 Map CR/CS

If you want to map Check Record/Check Sheet (CR/CS) for any added master equipment,

1. Click (Add icon) provided in the Map CR/CS column.

   The Map CR/CS window opens.

   

2. Select the checkbox of the CR/CS which you want to map.

3. Click Save/Close.

3.16.3 Clone a Master Equipment

The Clone option in the Clone column of the Master Equipment page used to add a master equipment as a copy of the previously added master equipment, See Fig 3.16.

1. Click  (Clone icon) in the Clone column of the Master Equipment page.

   A new window opens to add the master equipment.

2. Enter the details of the master equipment.  

   The new master equipment will be added.

3.16.4 Edit Any Master Equipment

If you want to edit any master equipment in the Master Equipment page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective master equipment. See Fig 3.16.

   The page shows the added details of the master equipment.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

3.16.5 Export Master Equipments List

You can export a list of master equipment added in the Master Equipment page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.16.6 Filter Any Master Equipment 

If you want to filter any master equipment from the list of master equipments in the Master Equipment page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

3.16.7 Import Multiple Master Equipments

You can import multiple master equipments together by using a pre-defined template given in the application. If you want to import multiple master equipments together, do the following,

1. Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Master Equipment See Fig 3.16.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of master equipment.

   

2.  Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the master equipment details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.16.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5.  Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  
6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click (Upload button) to export the piece mark numbers that are included in the excel worksheet.  

The details of the master equipments included in the worksheet will be displayed in the Master Equipment page.

3.17 Systems

You can add the details of systems to be used in the Structural project by using the Systems tab in the Project Data menu. If you want to navigate to Systems,

1. Click Systems in the Project Data menu.

   The System page opens.

   

                                                               Figure 3.17: System page

3.17.1 Add System

If you want to add a new system, do the following steps,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the System page. See Fig 3.17.

   A new window opens to add a new system.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2.  In the System box, enter the system name.

3. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the system name.  

4. In the System Number box, enter the system number.

5. Click Save.

   The system is successfully added and listed in the System page.

    

   Note: If you want to map cover page for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Cover Page column and add the cover pages.

   If you want to map certificates for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map Certificates column and add the cover pages.

   If you want to map Check Record/Check Sheet (CR/CS) for any added system, click the respective (Add icon) provided in the Map CR/CS column and add the cover pages.

3.17.2 Edit System

If you want to edit any existing system in the System page,

1. Click (Edit icon) of the respective System. See Fig 3.17.

   The System page shows the details of the selected system.

2. Edit the details where you want.

3. Click Save.

3.17.3 Delete System

If you want to delete any existing system in the System page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the System page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.17.4 Export System List

You can export a list of systems added in the System page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.17.5 Filter System

If you want to filter any specific system in the System page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the System page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.  

3.17.6 Import Multiple Systems

If you want to import multiple systems together, do the following,

1. Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.17.

   An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of systems.

   

2.  Enter the required system details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet.
3. Once you have added the system details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.17.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click   (Upload button) to export the systems that are included in the excel worksheet.

The details of the systems in the worksheet will be displayed in the System page.

3.17.7 Attach a File into a System

If you want to attach any file with any system listed in the System page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

3.18 Sub Systems

The Sub Systems tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add the details of sub systems to be in used in the Structural Project. If you want to navigate to Sub Systems,

1. Click Sub Systems in the Project Data menu.

   The Sub Systems page opens.

   

                                                          Figure 3.18: Sub System page

3.18.1 Add Sub System

If you want to add a new sub system, do the following steps,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Sub System page. See Fig 3.18.

   A new window opens to add a new sub system.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list.

3. In the Sub System box, select a sub system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Abbreviation box, enter the abbreviation for the sub system.  

5. In the Sub System Number box, enter the sub system number.

6. If the added subsystem needs to be flushed, select Yes in the Flushing option otherwise select No.

7. If there is need to perform the leakage test for the added subsystem, select Yes in the Leak Test option otherwise select No.

8. In the Description box, enter the description for the added sub system.

9. Click Save.

The sub system is successfully added and listed in the Sub System page.

3.18.2 Edit Sub System

If you want to edit any existing sub system in the Sub System page,

1. Click (Edit icon) of the respective sub system. See Fig 6.18.

   The Sub System page shows the details of the selected sub system.

2.  Edit the details where you want.

3. Click Save.

3.18.3 Delete Sub System

If you want to delete any existing sub system in the Sub System page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Sub System page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.18.4 Export Sub System List

You can export a list of sub systems added in the Sub System page in both the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.18.5 Filter Sub System

If you want to filter any specific sub system in the Sub System page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Sub System page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.  

3.18.6 Import Multiple Sub Systems

If you want to import multiple sub systems together, do the following,

1. Click (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.18.

   An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of sub systems.

   

2. Enter the required sub system details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the sub system details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.
4. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.18.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click  (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  
6.  Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click   (Upload button) to export the sub systems that are included in the excel worksheet.  

   The details of the sub systems in the worksheet will be displayed in the Sub System page.

3.18.7 Attach a File into a Sub System

If you want to attach any file with any sub system listed in the Sub System page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

3.19 Import from Excel – Masters

The Import from Excel – Masters tab helps you to upload master data for all fields instead of uploading data for each field individually.

If you want to import master data for different fields, do the following,

1. Click Import from Excel – Masters in the Project Data menu.

   The File Upload page opens.

   

                                                     Figure 3.19: File Upload page

2. Download a template by using  (TEMPLATE button) to enter the details of master data.

   An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a pre-defined template to the details.

   

3.  Enter the relevant details in the respective column of the excel worksheet.

4. Click   (Choose File button).

   Once the file has been uploaded successfully, you receive a message, “Successfully uploaded”

5. Click  (Get Columns button).

   The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field.

   Note:  Make sure that the Excel Column field must have all the columns as in the System Column field.

6. To map the columns in the System Column and Excel Column fields, do one of the following,

   1. 1. If you want to map the columns automatically, click (AutoMap button).

         The columns will be mapped automatically and displayed in the Mapped Columns field.

      2. If you want to map each column manually, select the respective columns in both the System Columnand Excel Column fields and then click   (Map button).

         The selected columns will be mapped and displayed in the Mapped Columns field.

         

7. To un-map the columns in the Mapped Columns field, select the respective column and then click (UnMap button).

   Once you have completed the mapping and un-mapping of columns, you must enter the range for uploading the data from the excel worksheet.  

   Note: In the Total Rows field, the system indicates the total number of rows filled in the excel worksheet.

   Tip: You must enter the upload starting range as two in the Upload Range From field because a first row in the excel worksheet is having heading of the columns.

8.  In the Upload Range From and To fields, enter the range of rows you want to upload from the excel worksheet.

9. Click   (Populate Values button).

   The data are populated.

10.  Click  (Process button).

    The system processes all the uploaded data and displays in the Excel Import page.

    

11.  Click  (Update button) to import the uploaded data.

    The data will be successfully imported.

3.20 Workflow Settings

The Workflow Settings tab in the Project Data menu used to set a workflow in the Structural project.

1. Click Workflow Settings in the Project Data menu.

   The Workflow page opens.

   

                                                       Figure 3.20: Workflow page

3.20.1 Add a Workflow

If you want to add a workflow,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Workflow page. See Fig 3.20.

   The page shows a new window to add the category.

   

2. In the Category box, select a category from a drop-down list.

3. Click Save.

   The added category will be listed in the Workflow page. See Fig 3.20.

4. Click  (Add icon) of the respective category.

   The Workflow Details window opens.

   

    
5. Click  (ADD button) in the Workflow Details window.

   

6. In the Role Name box, select a role name from a drop-down list.

7. In the Description box, enter the description for the role name.

8. Click Save.

3.20.2 Edit a Workflow

If you want to edit any existing workflow in the Workflow page,

1. Click (Edit icon) of the respective workflow. See Fig 3.20.

   The Workflow page shows the details of the selected workflow.

2. Edit the details where you want.

3. Click Save.

3.20.3 Delete a Workflow

If you want to delete any existing workflow in the Workflow page, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Workflow page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.20.4 Export Workflow List

You can export a list of workflows added in the Workflow page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.20.5 Filter Any Workflow 

If you want to filter any specific workflow, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Workflow page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

3.21 Job Code

Job codes are individualized sets of numbers assigned to different jobs in order to identify which class a position belongs to. The Job Code tab in the Project Data menu used to add a job code.

1. Click Job Code in the Project Data menu.

   The Job Code page opens.

   

                                                       Figure 3.21: Job Code page

3.21.1 Add a Job Code

If you want to add a new job code, do the following steps,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Job Code page. See Fig 3.21.

   A new window opens to add a new job code.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2.  In the Description box, enter the description for a job code you want to add.

3. In the Item No box, enter the item number.

4. In the Job Code box, enter the job code.

5. In the VO No box, enter the VO number.

6. Click Save.

   The job code is added and listed in the Job Code page.

3.21.2 Edit Any Job Code

If you want to edit any existing job code in the Job Code page,

1. Click  (Edit icon) of the respective job code. See Fig 3.21.

   The Job Code page shows the details of the selected job code.

2. Edit the details where you want.

3. Click Save.

3.21.3 Delete Any Job Code

If you want to delete any existing job code in the Job Code page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Job Code page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

3.21.4 Export Job Code List

You can export a list of job codes added in the Job Code page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.21.5 Filter Any Job Code

If you want to filter any specific job code in the Job Code page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Job Code page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.  

3.21.6 Import Multiple Job Codes

If you want to import multiple job codes together, do the following,

1. Click  (TEMPLATE button). See Fig 3.21.

   An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a predefined template to enter the details of job code.

2. Enter the required job code details in the respective columns of the excel worksheet.
3. Once you have added the job code details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.
4. Click (IMPORT button). See Fig 3.21.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  
6.  Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.
7. Click   (Upload button) to export the sub systems that are included in the excel worksheet. 

The details of the job codes in the worksheet will be displayed in the Job Code page.

3.22 Inspection Test Plan (ITP)

ITP is a document or series of documents used for quality assurance purposes. ITP outlines how the quality of a particular material will be ensured both at beginning and throughout the service life.

The Inspection Test Plan tab in the Project Data menu allows you to add the inspection test plan report. If you want to add the inspection test plan report, do the following,

1. Click the Inspection Test Plan tab in the Project Data menu.

   The Inspection Test Plan (ITP) page opens.

   

                                                        Figure 3.22: ITP page

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2.  In the Template box, select a template from a drop-down list appears on the Select from Templates box or the Select from Equipments box.

   Tip: A report number for the ITP report will be updated automatically in the ITP Report Number box.

3.  In the ITP Status box, select the ITP status from a drop-down list.

4. In the Date box, choose the date of status update.

5. In the Non-Destructive Examination (NDE)box, enter the NDE details.

6. In the Remarks box, enter your remark if any.

7. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the ITP report.

8. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the ITP report.

9. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the ITP report.

10. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the ITP report.  

11. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the ITP report.

12. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the ITP report.

13. Click Save.

    The ITP report is successfully added.

3.22.1 Export ITP reports list

You can export a list of added ITP reports in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.23 Check List

The Check List tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add a check list that will be used in adding a final visual test report.  

1. Click the Check List tab in the Project Data menu.

   The Check List page opens.

   

                                                       Figure 3.23: Check List page

3.23.1 Add a Check List 

If you want to add a check list,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Check List page. See Fig 3.23.

   A new window opens to add a check list.

   

   Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving.

2.  In the Check List box, enter the check list number.

3. In the Comments box, type your comments if any.

4. Click Save.

   The check list is added successfully.  

3.23.2 Export Check Lists

You can export a list of added check lists in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

3.24 NDT Procedures

The NDT procedures tab in the Project Data menu helps you to add an NDT procedure. If you want to add an NDT procedure, do the following,

1. Click NDT Procedures in the Project Data menu.

   The NDT Procedure page opens.

   

                                               Figure 3.24: NDT Procedure page

3.24.1  Add an NDT Procedure

If you want to add an NDT procedure,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the NDT Procedure page. See Fig 3.24.

   A new window opens to add an NDT procedure.

   

2. In the NDT Procedure box, select the NDT procedure from a drop-down list.

3. In the NDT Procedure Title box, enter the NDT procedure title.

4. Click Save.

The NDT procedure is successfully added.

3.24.2 Add NDT Procedure Revision

Once you have added the NDT procedure, you must add the NDT procedure revision. You can add multiple revisions for one NDT procedure.

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Revision column of the NDT Procedure See Fig 3.24.

   The NDT Procedure Revision window opens.  

   

2. Click   (ADD button) in the NDT Procedure Revision window.

   A new window opens to add the NDT revision procedure.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for the revision will be updated automatically in the Report Number/ Revision box.

3.  In the Description box, enter the description for the NDT procedure revision.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the revision.

5. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the revision.

6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the revision.

7. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the revision.

8. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the revision.

9. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the revision.

10. Click Save.

3.24.3 Print an NDT procedure report

If you want to print an NDT procedure report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the NDT Procedure page. See Fig 3.24.

3.24.4  Attach a File into an NDT Procedure

If you want to attach any file with the NDT procedure listed in the NDT Procedure page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

Materials

4.0 Materials

The Materials menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used to add the material details such as material certificates, material inspection details, material import details, and material summary and traceability record.

The Materials menu appears with four options such as Material Certificates, Material Import, Material Inspection, and Reports. The Material Certificates option helps you to add material certificates details for the structural project.

The Material Import option helps you to bulk add the materials. The Material Inspection option helps you to add material receiving report, material inspection, and material verification report.

The Reports option used to add material traceability record and material summary by using heat number.

4.1 Material Certificates

Mill Certificate is a certificate document of the steel industry, which is used to certify the product is produced by manufacturing standards of the mill. Once you have received the materials from the manufacturer, you must enter the details of materials.

 The Material Certificates (Mill Certificates) tab used to add the received material details including mill certification ID and mill certification number. If you want to add material certificates, do the following,

1. Click Material Certificates in the Materials menu.

   The Mill Certificates page opens.

   

                                                            Figure 4.1: Mill Certificates page

4.1.1 Add a Material Certificate

If you want to add a material certificate, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Mill Certificates page. See Fig 4.1.

   A new window opens to add a material certificate.

   

   Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the Component box, select a component from a drop-down list.

3. In the Certification box, enter the certification number of the material.

4. In the Manufacturer box, enter the name of the manufacturer.

5. In the Mill Certificate Date box, choose the mill certificate date.

6. In the Delivery Order (DO) Number box, enter the delivery order number of the component.

7. In the Purchase Order (PO) Number box, enter the purchase order number of the component.

8. In the Size box, select the size of the received component.

9. In the Thickness box, select the thickness of the received component.

10. In the Class box, enter the class of the received component.

11. In the Material box, select the type of material the component is made from.

12. In the Rating box, enter the rating of the component.

13. In the Expiry Date box, choose the expiry date of the component.

14. Click Save.

The material certificate is successfully added. Once you have added the mill certificate, you must add heat numbers for the added component.

4.1.2 Add Heat Numbers

If you want to add heat numbers, do the following steps,

1. Click  (Add icon) of the respective mill certificate.

   The Heat Numbers box opens.

   

                                           Figure 4.1.1: Heat Numbers page

2. Click  (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers box.

   A new window opens to add the heat number.

   

3.  In the planned Project box, select a project you want from a drop-down list.

4. In the Heat Number box, enter the heat number.

5. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

6. Click Save.

4.1.3 Edit Any Heat Number

If you want to edit any existing heat numbers,

1. Click   (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective heat number.
2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.1.4 Delete Any Heat Number

If you want to delete any heat number, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Heat Numbers page, See Fig 4.1.1.

1. Click (Delete icon) for the corresponding heat number.

   You receive a notification message “Confirm delete?”.

2. Click OK.

4.1.5 Print a Material Consumption Report

If you want to print a material consumption report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column. See Fig 4.1.1.

4.1.6 Attach a File into a Mill Certificate

If you want to attach any file with the mill certificates listed in the Mill Certificates page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

4.1.7 Edit Any Mill Certificates

 If you want to edit any existing mill certificate in the Mill Certificates page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective mill certificate. See Fig 4.1.

   A new window opens to edit the mill certificate.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.1.8 Delete Any Mill Certificate

If you want to delete any specific mill certificate from the list of mill certificates, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Mill Certificates page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

4.1.9 Export Mill Certificates List

You can export a list of mill certificates added in the Mill Certificates page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

4.1.10 Filter Any Mill Certificate

If you want to filter any mill certificate from the list of mill certificates in the Mill Certificates page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

4.1.11 Import Multiple Mill Certificates

If you want to import multiple mill certificates together, do the following,

1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Mill Certificates page. See Fig 4.1.

   A template will be downloaded as an excel worksheet to enter the details of multiple mill certificates.

   

2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

3. Once you have added the mill certificates details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

4. Click  (IMPORT button). See Fig 4.1.

   A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

   

5. Click   (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

7. Click  (Upload button) to export the mill certificates that are included in the excel worksheet.

The details of the mill certificates in the worksheet will be displayed in the Mill Certificates 

4.2 Material Take Off 

Material Take Off ((MTO) report refers to a list of a materials including quantities and grades that are required in the structural project.

 The Material Take Off tab helps you to add an MTO report. If you want to add an MTO report, do the following,

1. Click the Material Take Off tab in the Materials menu.  

   The MTO Report page opens.

   

                                                    Figure 4.2: MTO Report page

4.2.1 Add an MTO Report

1. Click  (ADD button) in the MTO Report page. See Fig 4.2.

   A new window opens to add an MTO report.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new MTO report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2.  In the Customer Name box, select the name of a customer.

3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the MTO report.

4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the MTO report.

5. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the MTO report.

6. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the MTO report.  

7. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the MTO report.

8. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the MTO report.

9. Click Save.

The MTO report is successfully added. Once you have added the MTO report, you must add the material details for the added report.

4.2.2 Add Material Details

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the MTO Report See Fig 4.2.

   The Report Parameters box opens.  

   

2. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Parameters box.

   A new window opens in the Material Type column.

3.  Enter the material name in the Material Type column.

4. Enter the grade of the material in the Material Grade column.

5. Enter the relevant details in the respective columns of the Report Parameters box.

6. Click Save.  

    Tip: If you want to delete the added material details, click  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Report Parameters box.

4.2.3 Edit Any MTO Reports

 If you want to edit any existing MTO report in the MTO Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MTO Report See Fig 4.2.

   A new window opens to edit the MTO report.

   

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.2.4 Attach a File into an MTO Report

If you want to attach any file with the MTO reports listed in the MTO Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

4.2.5 Print an MTO Report

If you want to print an MTO report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the MTO Report page. See Fig 4.2.

4.2.6 Export MTO Reports

You can export a list of MTO reports added in the MTO Report page. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

4.3 Material Receiving and Inspection (Heat Numbers)

Material Receiving Inspection validates quality of purchased raw materials based on set acceptance criteria before the materials are used for the Structural project.

The Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an incoming material inspection report (MIR). Incoming MIR includes material name, material size, material specification, heat numbers, and material type.

If you want to add an incoming MIR, do the following,

1. Click Material Receiving and Inspection in the Materials menu.

   The Incoming Material Inspection Report page opens.

   

                                    Figure 4.3: Incoming Material Inspection Report page

4.3.1 Add an Incoming MIR

If you want to add an incoming MIR,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Incoming Material Inspection Report See Fig 4.3.

   A new window opens to add an incoming MIR.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number and a Request for Inspection (RFI) number for a new MIR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively.

2. In the Delivery Order Number box, enter the material’s delivery order number.

3. If the materials are received from a client, select the MUHIBBAH Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes.

   

   1. 1. In the P.O. No box, enter the purchase order number.

      2. In the Dated box, choose the date of the purchase order.

      3. In the Received On box, select the received date of materials.

4. If the materials are purchased from outside, select the FREE Issued Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes.

   

   1. 1. In the Packing List No box, enter the packing list number.

      2. In the Dated box, choose the date of packing.

      3. In the Received On box, choose the received date of materials.

5. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection.

6. In the Vendor Name box, enter the vendor name.  

7. In the Request Description box, enter the request description.

8. In the ITP Number box, select an ITP number.

9. In the Delivery Note box, enter the delivery note.

10. In the Location box, enter the location name.

11. In the Sub Contractor box, select the subcontractor name from a drop-down list.

12. Click Save.

The incoming MIR is successfully added. Once you have added the MIR, you must add the material details for the added MIR.

4.3.2 Add Materials for an Incoming MIR

If you want to add the details of materials for the added incoming MIR, do the following steps,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit MIR column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report See Fig 4.3.

   The Add/Edit - Materials window opens.  

   

                                               Figure 4.3.1: Add/Edit – Materials window

2. Click  (ADD button) in the Add/Edit - Materials window.

   A new window opens to add the material details.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

3.  In the Material Description box, enter the material description.

4. In the Material Size box, select the size of the material.

5. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification.

6. In the Material Type box, enter the type of the material.

7. In the Quantity Required box, enter the required quantity of the material.

8. In the Item No box, enter the item number.

9. In the Weight box, enter the weight of the material.

10. In the Component box, select a component.

11. Click Update.

Once you have added the material details, you must add the heat numbers for the added materials.

4.3.3 Add Heat Numbers 

1. Click  (Add icon) of the respective material in the Add/Edit - Materials See Fig 4.3.1.

   The Heat Numbers window opens.

   

2. Click   (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers window.

   A new window opens to add a heat number.

   

3. In the Heat Number/Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Plate Number/Coil Number/ Tag Number box, enter the plate number or coil number or tag number of the material.

5. In the Delivery Quantity (Total) box, enter the total delivery quantity of the material including UOM.

6. In the Delivery Quantity (Partial) box, enter the partial delivery quantity of the material including UOM.

7. In the Dimensions option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail.

8. In the Visual option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail.

9. In the Mill Test Certificates (MTC) option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail.

10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

11. If the heat treatment is required for the material, select YES in the Heat Treatment Otherwise select NO.

12. In the NDE is required for the material, select YES in the NDE option. Otherwise select NO.

13. Click Update.

Note: If you want to manage the review material TC, click  (Add icon). The Review Material TC window opens to add the material checklist detail.

4.3.4 Add MIR Details

If you want to add the details of MIR,

1. Click  (Add icon) in the Add See Fig 4.3.

   The MIR Details window opens.

   

2. In the Manufacturer Name box, enter the manufacturer name.

3. In the Supplier box, enter the supplier name.

4. In the Unloaded box, enter the unloaded detail.

5. In the Date box, select the date of MIR.

6. In the Truck/Trailer No box, enter the truck/trailer number.

7. In the Defect Report No box, enter the defect report number.

8. In the Storage Area box, enter the storage area name.

9. In the Defect box, enter the defect detail.

10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

11. Click Save.

4.3.5 Print an Incoming MIR Report

If you want to print an incoming MIR report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3.

4.3.6 Print a Report with MTC

If you want to print an incoming MIR report including MTC, click (print icon) provided in the Report with MTC column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3.

4.3.7 Print a Report Raw Material Offer List

If you want to print a report raw material offer list, click  (print icon) provided in the Report Raw Material Offer List column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3.

4.3.8 Print a MIR Summary Report

If you want to print a MIR summary report, click  (print icon) provided in the upper side of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.3.

4.3.9 Attach a File into an Added Incoming MIR 

If you want to attach any file with any incoming MIR listed in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

4.3.10 Edit Any Incoming MIR 

If you want to edit any existing incoming MIR in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MIR. See Fig 4.3.

   A new window opens to edit the added incoming MIR.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.3.11 Filter Any Incoming MIR

If you want to filter any incoming MIR from the list of MIRs in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page,

• you can use the request status wise filter box provided in the upper side of the Incoming Material Inspection Report  
• You can also use  (FILTER button) located on the Incoming Material Inspection Report  To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

4.3.12 Export Incoming MIR list

You can export a list of MIR added in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page in the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

4.4 Material Verification Report (MVR) (Heat Numbers)

MVR will be used while go for material inspection. The Material Verification Report tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an MVR inspection request.  If you want to add an MVR inspection request, do the following steps,

1. Click Material Verification Report in the Materials menu.

   The MVR Inspection Request page opens.

   

                                                      Figure 4.4: MVR Inspection Request page

4.4.1 Add an MVR Inspection Request

If you want to add an MVR inspection request,

1. Click    (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request See Fig 4.4.

   A new window opens to add an MVR inspection request.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number and an RFI report number for a new MVR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively.

2.  In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection.

3. In the Description box, enter the description for the MVR.

4. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list.

5. Click Save.

The MVR is successfully added. Once you have added the MVR, you must add the RFI data for the added MVR.

4.4.2 Add RFI Data for an Added MVR Inspection Request

If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added MVR inspection request, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the MVR Inspection Request See Fig 4.4.

   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens.  

   

2. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start.

3. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end.

4. In the Inspection Details option, select 1^st Inspection, 2^nd Inspection or 3^rd Inspection according to the inspection details.

5. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details.

6. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference.

7. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date.

8. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected.

9. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

10. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection.  

11. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection.

12. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person.

13. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed.

14. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML.

15. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date.

16. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB.

17. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date.

18. Click Save.  

Once you have added the RFI data, you must add the result for the added MVR inspection request.

4.4.3 View an RFI Report

If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.4.

4.4.4 Add Result for an Added MVR Inspection Request 

1. Click (Add icon) of the respective report number.

   The MVR Inspection Request Details window opens.

   

2.  Click (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request Details window.

   A new window opens to add result.

   

3. In the Piece Mark No box, select the piece mark number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Heat Number / Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list.

5. In the Size box, enter the size of the material.

6. In the Type of Material box, enter the type of material.

7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

8. Click Save.

Once you have added the result for the MVR inspection request, you must submit and approve the MVR inspection request.

4.4.5 Submit and Approve an MVR Inspection Report

Once you have added the result, the Submission column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the MVR inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the MVR inspection request, the Request Status column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with  (Accept and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the MVR inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click   (Reject icon) to reject the request.

4.4.6 Print an MVR Inspection Report

If you want to print an MVR inspection report, click (print icon) in the Report column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.4.

4.4.7 Attach a File into an MVR Inspection Request

If you want to attach any file with an existing MVR inspection request listed in the MVR Inspection Request page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

4.4.8 Edit Any MVR Inspection Request 

If you want to edit any existing MVR inspection request in the MVR Inspection Request page, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MVR inspection request. See Fig 4.4.

   A new window opens to edit the MVR inspection request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.4.9 Filter Any MVR Inspection Request

If you want to filter any MVR request from the list of requests in the MVR Inspection Request page, you can use (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

4.4.10 Export MVR Inspection Request List

You can export a list of MVR inspection requests added in the MVR Inspection Request page in the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

4.5 Welding Consumable Register List

Welding Consumables are products used to create strong joints between two or more parts while welding. Welding Consumable are segmented based on welding technique, welding consumable type, end-use industry, and region.

The Welding Consumable Register List tab in the Materials menu used to add a weld consumable list. If you want to add a welding consumable list, do the following,

1. Click the Welding Consumable Register List tab in the Materials menu.

   The Welding Consumable Register List page opens.

   

                                         Figure 4.5: Welding Consumable Register List page

4.5.1 Add a Welding Consumable List

If you want to add a welding consumable list, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Welding Consumable Register List See Fig 4.5.

   A new window opens to add a welding consumable list.

   

   Note:  The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that field before saving.

    Tip: A report number for a new welding consumable list will be updated automatically in the Report Number / Rev box.

2.  In the Buyer Name box, enter the name of a buyer.

3. In the Supplier box, enter the name of a supplier of welding consumables.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the welding consumable list.
5. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the welding consumable list.
6. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the welding consumable list.
7. In the Prepared Date box, choose the prepared date of the welding consumable list.  

8. In the Reviewed Date box, choose the reviewed date of the welding consumable list.

9. In the Approved Date box, choose the approved date of the welding consumable list. 

10. Click Save.

The welding consumable register list is successfully added. Once you have added the register list, you must add the consumable details for the added register list.

Tip: If you want to add a copy of added welding consumable register list, click Revision in the Revision column of the Welding Consumable Register List page.

4.5.2 Add Welding Consumable Details for Added Consumable List

If you want to add the details of welding consumables for the added list, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Welding Consumable Register List See Fig 4.5.

   A new window opens to add the welding consumable details.

   

2. In the Welding Process box, enter the type of welding process.

3. In the Class box, enter the class of welding consumable.

4. In the Trade Name box, enter the trade name of welding consumable.

5. In the Lot Number box, enter the lot number of the welding consumable.

6. In the Number / Quantity (Kgs) box, enter the number or quantity of the welding consumable.

7. In the Dia box, enter the diameter of the welding consumable.

8. In the CIR Number box, enter the CIR number of the welding consumable.  

9. In the Date of CIR box, select the date of CIR.

10. In the Certificate No box, enter the certificate number.

11. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any

12. In the Status box, select Accepted, Rejected or Hold from a drop-down list.

13. Click Save.  

Once you have added the welding consumable details, you must add the result for the added consumable list.

4.5.3 Submit a Welding Consumable List

Once you have added the welding consumable details, the Submission column in the Welding Consumable Register List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the welding consumable list, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

4.5.4 Print a Welding Consumable Report

If you want to print a welding consumable report, click  (print icon) in the Report column of the Welding Consumable Register List page. See Fig 4.5.

4.5.5 Attach a File into a Welding Consumable Register List

If you want to attach any file with any welding consumable register list in the Welding Consumable Register List page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

4.5.6 Edit Any Welding Consumable Register List 

If you want to edit any existing welding consumable register list in the Welding Consumable Register List page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective welding consumable register list. See Fig 4.5.

   A new window opens to edit the welding consumable register list.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.5.7 Export Welding Consumable Register List

You can export a list of welding consumable register list added in the Welding consumable Register List page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

4.6 Import Materials

The Import from Excel - Materials tab helps you to upload various data related to materials for different fields included in the Materials menu instead of uploading data for each field individually.

 If you want to import data for different fields, do the following,

1. Click the Import from Excel – Materials tab in the Materials menu.

   The File Upload page opens.

   

2. Download a template by using the  (TEMPLATE button) to enter the details of data.

   An excel worksheet will be downloaded.

   

3. Enter the relevant details in the respective column of the excel worksheet based on the columns listed in the System Column field.

4. Click   (Choose File button).

   Once the file has been uploaded successfully, you receive a message, “Successfully uploaded”

5. Click (Get Columns button).

   The columns added in the excel worksheet will be listed in the Excel Column field. The system automatically maps the Required Columns to Import field and the Excel Column field and displays in the Mapped Columns field.

   

6. If you want to map any columns or to unmap any mapped columns, select the respective columns and then click (Map button) and  (UnMap button) accordingly.

7. Once you have completed the mapping and unmapping of columns, in the Upload Range From and To fields, enter the range of rows you want to upload from the excel worksheet.

    Note: In the Total Rows field, the system indicates the total number of rows filled in the excel worksheet.

   Tip: You must enter the upload starting range as two in the Upload Range From field because a first row in the excel worksheet is having heading of the columns.

8.  Click  (Populate Value button).

9. Click  (Process button).

   Once you have clicked the Process button, the system processes the columns and displays in the Excel Import page.

   

10. Click   (Import button) to import the data added in the excel worksheet.

4.7 Material Traceability Record

The Material Traceability Record tab in the Materials menu used to track a material traceability record (MTR). If you want to add an MTR, do the following,

1. Click the Material Traceability Record tab in the Materials menu.  

   The Material Traceability Record page opens.

   

                                                                 4.7: Material Traceability Record page

    

2. Click   (ADD button) in the Material Traceability Record page. See Fig 4.7.

   A new window opens to add an MTR.

   

     Tip: A report number for a new MTR will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

3.  In the Location box, enter the location detail.

The MTR is added. Once you have added the MTR, you must add the cutting plan drawing details for the added MTR.

4.7.1 Add a Cutting Plan Drawing for an MTR

If you want to add a cutting plan drawing for the added MTR, do the following,

1. Click (Add icon) provided in the Add Cutting Plan Drawing column of the Material Traceability Record page.

   The Cutting Plan Drawing Details box opens.

   

2.  Click (ADD button) in the Cutting Plan Drawing Details box.

   A new window opens to add a master drawing number and a cutting plan drawing number.

   

3. In the Cutting Plan Drawing Number box, select the mater drawing and cutting plan drawing numbers from a drop-down list.

4. Click Save.

4.7.2 Print an MTR report

If you want to print an MTR report, click (print icon) in the Report column of the Material Traceability Record page. See Fig 4.7.

4.7.3 Attach a File into an MTR

If you want to attach any file with any MTR list in the Material Traceability Record page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

4.7.4 Edit Any MTR

If you want to edit any existing MTR in the Material Traceability Record page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MTR. See Fig 4.7.

   A new window opens to edit the MTR.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.7.5 Export MTR List

You can export a list of MTRs added in the Material Traceability Record page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

4.7.6 Filter Any MTR

If you want to filter any MTR from the list of MTRs in the Material Traceability Record page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

4.8 Material Summary

The Material Summary tab in the Materials menu used to track the material summary details. If you want to trach the summary details of the material, do the following,

1. Click the Material Summary tab in the Materials menu.

   The Material Summary Details page opens.

   

                                               Figure 7.8: Material Summary Details page

2.  In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification.

3. In the From and To boxes, choose the respective from and to dates to get the material summary details.

4. Click Search.

The summary details of the added material specification will be displayed for the selected period.  

4.8.1 Export Material Summary Details

You can export a list of MTRs added in the Material Summary Details page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

4.9 Material Summary by Heat Number

The Summary by Heat Number tab in the Materials menu used to track the material summary details by using the respective heat numbers. If you want to track the summary details of the material, do the following,

1. Click the Summary by Heat Number tab in the Materials menu.

   The Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) page opens.

   

                                         Fig 4.9: Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) page

2. In the Heat Number box, select the heat number from a drop-down list.

3. Click Search.

 The material summary details corresponding to the selected heat number will be displayed.

4.9.1 Export Material Summary Details (By Heat Number)

You can export the material summary details in the Material Summary Details (By Heat Number) page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

4.10 Material Traceability Summary Report

If you want to view the material traceability summary report, navigate to the Material Traceability Summary Report tab in the Materials menu.

1. Click Material Traceability Summary Report in the Materials menu.

   The Material Traceability Summary Report page opens.

   

                                  Figure 4.10: Material Traceability Summary Report page

2. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates.

3. Click Show Report.  

The summary report for the selected date will be opened.

4.10.1 Print Material Traceability Summary Report

If you want to print a material traceability summary report, use and  (print icons) provided in the Material Traceability Summary Report page.

1. If you want to print the current page of the summary report, click  (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the summary report, click (print icon).

4.10.2 Export Material Traceability Summary Report

You can export the material traceability summary report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Material Traceability Summary Report page.

4.11 RFI Material Substitution

An RFI could be issued requesting for material substitutions if certain material is not available or cost exorbitantly high. Various subcontractors could be provided with these requests to find who has the best quality materials for the project.

You can add an RFI for material substitution by using the RFI Material Substitution tab in the Materials menu.

4.11.1 Add an RFI Material Substitution

If you want to add an RFI material substitution, do the following steps,

1. Click RFI Material Substitution in the Materials menu.

   The RFI Material Substitution page opens.

   

                                            Figure 4.11: RFI Material Substitution page

2.  In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested the material substitution.

3. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

4. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time.

5. In the Location box, enter the location name.

6. In the Center box, enter the center name.

7. In the Details of Work box, enter the work details.

8. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any.

   Before saving the added material substitution request, you must add the material substitution detail.

9.  Click (ADD button) in the Material Substitution Detail window.

10. In the Type box, select the type of material substitution.

11. In the Material box, enter the name of the material.

12. In the DWG. Ref box, enter the drawing reference number.

13. In the Original Size box, enter the original size of the material.

14. In the Original Grade box, enter the original grade of the material.

15. In the Item box, select an item.

16. In the QTY box, enter the quantity of the material.

17. Click Save. 

    The material substitution details will be added and listed in the Material Substitution Detail window.

    

    If you want to add the proposed material substitution detail,

18. Click (Add icon) in the Material Substitution Detail window.

    

19. Click (ADD button).

    

20. Enter the details of proposed material substitution.

21. Click Save.

    The request for material substitution will be added and listed in the View RFI Material Substitution page.

4.12 View RFI Material Substitution

The View RFI Material Substitution tab helps you to view and edit the material substitution request, which is added by using the RFI Material Substitution tab. This tab also allows you to add a new material substitution request.

1. Click View RFI Material Substitution in the Materials menu.

   The View RFI Material Substitution page opens with a list of added material substitution requests.

   

                                         Figure 4.12: View RFI Material Substitution page

4.12.1 Add an RFI Material Substitution

If you want to add a material substitution request, do the following steps,

1. Click (ADD button) in the View RFI Material Substitution page.

   The system redirects you to a new page to add a new material substitution request. To know how to add a material substitution request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Material Substitution”.

Once you have added the material substitution request, you must submit the added request to perform material substitution inspection.

4.12.2 Edit Any Material Substitution Inspection Request 

If you want to edit any existing material substitution inspection request in the View RFI Material Substitution page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective material substitution inspection request. See Fig 4.12.

   The RFI Material Substitution page opens with the details of the selected material substitution inspection request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.12.3 Submit and Approve an RFI Material Substitution

Once you have added the material substitution inspection request, the Submission column in the View RFI Material Substitution page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the material substitution inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the material substitution inspection request, the Request Status column in the View RFI Material Substitution page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the material substitution inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   The material substitution inspection request will be moved for material substitution inspection.

4.12.4 Add Results of Material Substitution Inspection

After completing the material inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps,

1. Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request.

   The Result window opens with the details of proposed and original materials.

   

2. In the Result column, select the result of each material from the given result options in the drop-down list.

3. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any.

4. Click Approve All & Save.

4.12.5 View a Material Substitution Report

If you want to view a material substitution report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View RFI Material Substitution page. See Fig 4.12.

4.12.6 Attach a File into an RFI Material Substitution

If you want to attach a file with any existing material substitution inspection request listed in the View RFI Material Substitution page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

4.12.7 View Signature Details of Inspectors

You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the material substitution inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the View RFI Material Substitution page.

4.12.8 Export an RFI Material Substitution List

You can export a list of material substitution requests added in the View RFI Material Substitution page in both the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

4.12.9 Filter Any RFI Material Substitution

If you want to filter any specific material substitution inspection request in the View RFI Material Substitution page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Material Substitution page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

4.13 Material Receiving and Inspection (Unique Numbers)

Material Receiving Inspection validates quality of purchased raw materials based on set acceptance criteria before the materials are used for the structural project.

The Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an incoming material inspection report (MIR). Incoming MIR includes material name, material size, material specification, and material type.

If you want to add an incoming MIR, do the following,

1. Click the Material Receiving and Inspection tab in the Materials menu.

   The Incoming Material Inspection Report page opens.

   

                                 Figure 4.13: Incoming Material Inspection Report page

4.13.1 Add an Incoming MIR

If you want to add an incoming MIR,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.13.

   A new window opens to add an incoming MIR.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number and an Request for Inspection (RFI) number for a new MIR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively.

2.  In the Delivery Order Number box, enter the material’s delivery order number.
3. If the materials are received from a client, select the DM Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes.

   

   1. 1. 1. In the P.O. No box, enter the purchase order number.

         2. In the Dated box, choose the date of the purchase order.

         3. In the Received On box, select the received date of materials.

4. If the materials are purchased from outside, select the FREE Issued Incoming Materials option, and then enter the relevant details in the respective boxes.

   

   1. 1. 1. In the Packing List No box, enter the packing list number.

         2. In the Dated box, choose the date of packing.

         3. In the Received On box, choose the received date of materials.

5. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection.

6. In the Vendor Name box, enter the vendor name.  

7. In the Delivery Note box, enter the delivery note.

8. In the Location box, enter the location name.

9. In the Sub Contractor box, select the subcontractor name from a drop-down list.

10. Click Save.

The incoming MIR is successfully added. Once you have added the MIR, you must add the material details for the added MIR.

4.13.2 Add Materials for an Incoming MIR

If you want to add the details of materials for the added incoming MIR, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit MIR column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report See Fig 4.13.

   The Add/Edit - Materials window opens.  

   

                                             Figure 4.13.1: Add/Edit – Materials window

2. Click (ADD button) in the Add/Edit - Materials window.

   A new window opens to add the material details.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

3. In the Material box, select the name of the material from a drop-down list.

4. In the Quantity Required box, enter the required quantity of the material.

5. In the Certificate Number box, enter the certificate number.

6. In the PO No box, enter the purchase order number.

7. In the Non-Conformance Report (NCR) No box, enter the NCR number.

8. In the Size/Thickness box, select the size/thickness of the received material from a drop-down list.

9. In the Heat Number box, enter the heat number of the material.

10. In the CEQ box, enter the CEQ number.

11. In the DO box, enter the deliver order number.

12. In the TQ No box, enter the TQ number.

13. In the Length box, select the length of the material from a drop-down list.

14. In the Plate Number box, enter the plate number of the material.

15. In the Material Type box, enter the type of the material.

16. In the CD Number box, enter the CD number.

17. In the Status box, select the status of the received material.

18. In the Material Type box, select the type of material from a drop-down list.

19. In the Grade box, select the grade of the material.

20. In the Unique No box, enter the unique number of the material.

21. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

22. In the Client Item No box, enter the client item number.

23. In the Supply Condition box, enter the supply condition details of the material.

24. In the Material Description box, enter the material description.

25. Click Update.  

Once you have added the material details, you must add the heat numbers for the added materials.

4.13.3 Add Heat Numbers 

1. Click (Add icon) of the respective material in the Add/Edit - Materials window. See Fig 4.13.1.

   The Heat Numbers window opens.

   

2.  Click (ADD button) in the Heat Numbers window.

   A new window opens to add a heat number.

   

3.  In the Heat Number/Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Plate Number/Coil Number/ Tag Number box, enter the plate number or coil number or tag number of the material.

5. In the Delivery Quantity (Total) box, enter the total delivery quantity of the material.

6. In the Delivery Quantity (Partial) box, enter the partial delivery quantity of the material.

7. In the CEQ box, enter the CEQ number.

8. In the CD Number box, enter the CD number.

9. In the Unique Number box, enter the unique number of the material.

10. In the Client Item Number box, enter the client item number.

11. In the Dimensions option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail.

12. In the Visual option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail.

13. In the Mill Test Certificates (MTC) option, select Accepted or Rejected based on the inspection detail.

14. In the Remarks option, enter your remarks if any.

15. If the heat treatment is required for the material, select YES in the Heat Treatment Otherwise select NO.

16. In the NDE is required for the material, select YES in the NDE option. Otherwise select NO.

17. Click Update.

Once you have added the heat numbers, you must add unique numbers for the material.

4.13.4 Add Unique Numbers

1. Click (Add icon) of the respective heat number in the Heat Numbers box.

   The Unique Numbers box opens.

   

2.  Click (ADD button) in the Unique Numbers window.

   A new window opens to add a unique number.

   

3. In the Unique Number box, enter a unique number for the respective heat number.

4. In the Original Number box, enter the original number of the material.

5. In the Size box, enter the size of the material.

6. Click Update.  

4.13.5 Print an Incoming MIR 

If you want to print an incoming MIR report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.13.

4.13.6 Print a Report with MTC

If you want to print an incoming MIR report including MTC, click (print icon) provided in the Report with MTC column of the Incoming Material Inspection Report page. See Fig 4.13.

4.13.7 Attach a File into an Added Incoming MIR

If you want to attach any file with any incoming MIR listed in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page,  follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

4.13.7.1 Edit Any Incoming MIR 

If you want to edit any existing incoming MIR in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MIR. See Fig 4.13.

   A new window opens to edit the added incoming MIR.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.13.8 Filter Any Incoming MIR

If you want to filter any incoming MIR from the list of MIRs in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page,

• you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

• If you want to filter any MIR based on the approval status of the MIR, click the Request Status box provided in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page and then select the appropriate option from a drop-down list.

  

• If you click the All option, the system shows a list of all MIRs.

• If you click the Approved option, the system shows a list of approved MIRs.

• If you click Not Approved option, the system shows a list of not approved MIRs.

4.13.9 Export Incoming MIR List

You can export a list of MIR added in the Incoming Material Inspection Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

4.14 Material Verification Report (MVR) (Unique Numbers)

MVR will be used while go for material inspection. The Material Verification Report tab in the Materials menu helps you to add an MVR inspection request.  If you want to add an MVR inspection request, do the following,

1. Click Material Verification Report in the Materials menu.

   The MVR Inspection Request page opens.

   

                                            Figure 4.14: MVR Inspection Request page

4.14.1 Add an MVR Inspection Request

If you want to add an MVR inspection request,

1. Click (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request See Fig 4.14.

   A new window opens to add an MVR inspection request.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number and an RFI report number for a new MVR will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Report Number boxes, respectively.

2.  In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection.

3. In the Description box, enter the description for the MVR.

4. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list.

5. Click Save.

   The MVR is successfully added. Once you have added the MVR, you must add the RFI data for the added MVR.

4.14.2 Add RFI Data for an Added MVR Inspection Request

If you want to add the details of RFI data for the added MVR inspection request, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.14.

   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens.  

   

    

2. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start.

3. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end.

4. In the Inspection Details option, select 1^stInspection, 2^nd Inspection or 3^rd Inspection according to the inspection details.

5. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details.

6. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference.

7. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date.

8. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected.

9. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

10. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection.  

11. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection.

12. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person.

13. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed.

14. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML.

15. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date.

16. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB.

17. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date.

18. Click Save.  

Once you have added the RFI data, you must add the result for the added MVR inspection request.

4.14.3 Print an RFI Report

If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the MVR Inspection Request page. See Fig 4.14.

4.14.4 Add Result for an Added MVR Inspection Request 

1. Click  (Add icon) of the respective report number.

   The MVR Inspection Request Details window opens.

   

2. Click  (ADD button) in the MVR Inspection Request Details window.

   A new window opens to add result.

   

3. In the Piece Mark No box, select the piece mark number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Heat Number / Certificates box, select the heat number from a drop-down list.

5. In the Size box, enter the size of the material.

6. In the Type of Material box, enter the type of material.

7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

8. Click Save.

   Once you have added the result for the MVR inspection request, you must submit and approve the MVR inspection request.

4.14.5 Submit and Approve an MVR Inspection Report

Once you have added the result, the Submission column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the MVR inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the MVR inspection request, the Request Status column in the MVR Inspection Request page is appeared with(Accept and Reject icons).

2.  If you want to approve the MVR inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request.

4.14.6 Print an MVR Inspection Report

1. If you want to print an MVR inspection report, click (print icon) in the Report column of the MVR Inspection Request See Fig 4.14.

4.14.7 Attach a File into an MVR Inspection Request

If you want to attach any file with any MVR inspection request listed in the MVR Inspection Request page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

4.14.8 Edit Any MVR Inspection Request 

If you want to edit any existing MVR inspection request in the MVR Inspection Request page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MVR inspection request. See Fig 4.14.

   A new window opens to edit the MVR inspection request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

4.14.9 Filter Any MVR Inspection Request

If you want to filter any MVR request from the list of requests in the MVR Inspection Request page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

4.14.10 Export MVR Inspection Request List

You can export a list of MVR inspection requests added in the MVR Inspection Request page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

Inspection

5.0 Inspection

The Inspection menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used to add a Request for Inspection (RFI) fit up request, an RFI weld VI request, and an NDT inspection request.

5.1 RFI Fit Up Request Generic

If you want to add an RFI fit up request generic, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page.

   A new window opens to add an RFI fit up request generic.

   

    Tip: A report number for a new RFI fit up request generic will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI fit up request generic.

3. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection.

5. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number.

6. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation value.

7. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value.

8. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done.

9. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list.

10. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

11. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

12. Click Save. 

The RFI fit up request generic is inserted successfully. Once you have added the RFI fit up request generic, you must add the RFI data for the added request.

5.1.2 Add RFI Data for an Added RFI Fit Up Request Generic

If you want to add RFI data for the added RFI fit up request generic, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic See Fig 5.1.

   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens.  

   

2.  In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start.

3. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end.

4. In the Inspection Details option, select 1^stInspection, 2^nd Inspection or 3^rd Inspection according to the inspection details.

5. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details.

6. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference.

7. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date.

8. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected.

9. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

10. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection.  

11. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection.

12. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person.

13. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed.

14. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML.

15. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date.

16. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB.

17. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date.

18. Click Save. 

    The RFI data is successfully added.

5.1.3 Clone an RFI Fit Up Request Generic 

The Clone option in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page used to create a RFI weld VI generic request in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, as a copy of RFI fit up request generic, See Fig 5.4.

If you click  (Clone icon) in the Clone column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, an RFI weld VI generic request is added in the RFI weld VI generic page.

 Tip: You can create multiple copies of RFI weld VI generic request for a single RFI fit up request generic.

5.1.4 Print an RFI Report

If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. See Fig 5.1.

5.1.5 Submit an RFI Fit Up Request Generic

Once you have added the RFI fit up request generic, the Submission column in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page is appeared with  (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the RFI fit up request generic, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click 

     (Reject icon) to reject the request.

5.1.6 Print an RFI Fit Up Request Generic Report

If you want to print an RFI fit up request generic report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Fit up Request Generic page. See Fig 5.1.

5.1.7 Attach a File into an RFI Fit Up Request Generic

If you want to attach any file with any RFI fit up request generic added in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.1.8 View Signature Details of QA User, Surveyor, and Client 

Once the RFI fit up inspection has completed, the QA, surveyor, and client add their signature based on their corresponding roles. You can view their signature by using (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page.

5.1.9 Edit Any RFI Fit Up Request Generic

If you want to edit any existing RFI fit up request generic in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI fit up request generic. See Fig 5.1.

   A new window opens to edit the RFI fit up request generic.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.1.10 Export RFI Fit Up Request Generic List

You can export a list of RFI fit up request generic added in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.1.11 Filter Any RFI Fit Up Request Generic

If you want to filter any RFI fit up request generic from the list of RFI fit up request generic in the RFI Fit up Request Generic page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.2  RFI Fit up Request (Heat Numbers)

The RFI Fit up Request tab allows you add an RFI fit up request to check the fit-up quality of pipes and joints used in the Structural project by a sub-contractor. To navigate to the RFI fit up request adding page,

1. Click RFI Fit up Request in the Inspection menu.

   The RFI Fit up Inspection Request page opens.

   

                                             Figure 4.2: RFI Fit up Inspection Request page

5.2.1 Add an RFI Fit Up Request

If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following steps,

1. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date.

   Note: The inspection date should be as current date or upcoming dates. The system will not accept if you have given the previous dates.

3. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list.

4. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list.

5. In the Drawing No box, select a drawing number.

6. In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI fit up request.

   Before saving the added fit up request, you must add joints for the fit-up request.

7. Click (Add icon) of the respective joints you want to add.

   The added joints will be moved and listed in the right side of the page.

   

8. In the Heat No 1 box, enter the heat number of the first component if you know.

9.  In the Heat No 2 box, enter the heat number of the second component if you know.

   Tip: If you want to remove any added joint, click(Remove icon) of the respective joint.

10. Click Save.

The RFI fit up request is successfully added. If you want to view the added request, navigate to t the View RFI Fit up page.

5.3 View RFI Fit up (Heat Numbers)

The View RFI Fit up tab helps you to view and edit the RFI fit up requests, which are added by using the RFI Fit up Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI fit up request.

1. Click View RFI Fit up in the Inspection menu.

   The Request for Inspection page opens with a list of added RFI fit up requests.

   

                                                Figure 5.3: Request for Inspection page

5.3.1 Add an RFI Fit Up Request

If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the RFI Fit up Request List page.

   The system redirects you into RFI Fit up Inspection Request page. To know how to add an RFI fit up request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Fit up Request”.

Once you have added the RFI fit up request, you must submit the added request for inspection.

5.3.2 Add Representative for Added RFI Fit Up Request

If you want to add a representative for any added RFI fit up request,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI fit up request.

   The Edit Form window opens.

   

2. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative.

3. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

5. Click Save.

5.3.3 Edit Any RFI Fit Up Request 

If you want to edit any existing RFI fit up request in the Request for Inspection page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI fit up request. See Fig 5.3.

   The RFI Fit up Inspection Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI fit up request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.3.4 Submit and Approve an RFI Fit Up Request

Once you have added the RFI fit up request, the Submission column in the RFI Fit up Request Lists page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.3.

1. If you want to submit the RFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the RFI fit up request, the Request Status column in the RFI Fit up Requests List page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the RFI fit up request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click 

     (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   The approved request will be moved to for inspection.

5.3.5 Add Results of RFI Fit Up Inspection

After completing the RFI fit up inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps,

1. Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request.

   The RFI Fit up Request List window opens with a list of joints.

   

2.  If you want to update the heat numbers and piece mark details, click on the respective box and update.

3. If you want to update the WPS number in the WPS Number column, you can change the WPS number from a drop-down list.

4. Update the result for root gap by selecting Accepted or Rejected in the Root Gap column based on the inspection.
5. Update the result for straight/ alignment by selecting Accepted or Rejected in the Strgt/Align column based on the inspection.

6. In the Edge Prep column, select the type of the edge preparation from a drop-down list.

7. In the Result column, update the RFI fit up inspection result by selecting Pending, Accepted, Rejected, or Cancelled.

8. In the Remarks column, enter you remarks if any.

5.3.6 View an RFI Fit Up Report

If you want to view an RFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Request for Inspection page. See Fig 5.3.

5.3.7 View Signature Details of Inspectors

You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the RFI fit up inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the Request for Inspection page.

5.3.8 Attach a File into an RFI Fit up Request 

If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI fit up request listed in the RFI Fit up Requests List page, you can attach the file by using(Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

5.3.9 Export RFI Fit up Request List

You can export a list of RFI fit up requests added in the RFI Fit up Requests List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

5.3.10 Filter RFI Fit up Request

If you want to filter any specific RFI fit up request in the RFI Fit up Requests List page,

• you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Fit up Requests List  To filter the any specific RFI fit up request, select the Drawing Number and Date in the boxes and click Search.
• you can use  (FILTER button) located on the RFI Fit up Requests List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.4 RFI Weld VI Generic

Once the RFI fit up inspection process has completed, the materials are moved for weld inspection process. The RFI Weld VI Generic tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an RFI weld VI generic.

1. Click the RFI Weld VI Generic tab in the Inspection menu.

   The RFI Weld VI Generic page opens.

   

   

   

                                              Figure 5.4: RFI Weld VI Generic page

5.4.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Generic

If you want to add an RFI weld VI generic, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Weld VI Generic page.

   A new window opens to add an RFI weld VI generic.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    Tip: A report number for a new RFI weld VI generic will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2.  In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI weld VI generic.

3. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection.

5. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number.

6. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation value.

7. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value.

8. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done.

9. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list.

10. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

11. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

12. Click Save. 

The RFI weld VI generic is added successfully. Once you have added the RFI weld VI generic, you must add the RFI data for the added request.

5.4.2 Add RFI Data for the Added RFI Weld VI Generic

If you want to add RFI data for the added RFI weld VI generic, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the RFI Weld VI Generic See Fig 5.4.

   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens.  

   

2. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start.

3. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end.

4. In the Inspection Details option, select 1^st Inspection, 2^nd Inspection or 3^rd Inspection according to the inspection details.

5. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details.

6. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference.

7. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date.

8. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected.

9. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

10. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection.  

11. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection.

12. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person.

13. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML.

14. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date.

15. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB.

16. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date.

17. Click Save.  

The RFI data is successfully added.

5.4.3 Clone an RFI Weld VI Generic

The Clone option in the RFI Weld VI Generic page used to create a vacuum test request, an air test request, a hydrostatic test request, and an NDT request, as a copy of RFI weld VI generic request.

1. Click (Clone icon) in the Clone column of the RFI Weld VI Generic page.

   The Clone box opens.

2. Select any test from the given list.

3. Click   (Add button).

   A new request for the selected test will be added in the respective pages.

5.4.4 Print an RFI Report

If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the RFI Weld VI Generic page. See Fig 5.4.

5.4.5 Submit an RFI Weld VI Generic

Once you have added the RFI weld VI generic, the Submission column in the RFI Weld VI Generic page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI generic, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

5.4.6 Print an RFI Weld VI Generic Report

If you want to print an RFI weld VI generic report, click   (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Weld VI Generic page. See Fig 5.4.

5.4.7 View Signature Details of QA User, Surveyor, and Client 

Once the weld VI inspection has completed, the QA, surveyor, and client add their signature based on their corresponding roles. You can view their signature by using (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Weld VI Generic page.

5.4.8 Attach a File into an RFI Weld VI Generic

If you want to attach any file with any RFI weld VI generic added in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.4.9 Edit Any RFI Weld VI Generic

If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI generic in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI generic. See Fig 5.4.

   A new window opens to edit the RFI weld VI generic.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.4.10 Export RFI Weld VI Generic List

You can export a list of RFI weld VI generic added in the RFI Weld VI Generic page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.4.11 Filter Any RFI Weld VI Generic

If you want to filter any RFI weld VI generic from the list of RFI weld VI generic in the RFI Weld VI Generic page, you can use the   (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.5 RFI Weld VI Request (Heat Numbers)

The RFI Weld VI Request tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add an RFI weld VI request to perform visual inspection of welded pipes and joints used in the Structural project. To navigate to the RFI weld VI request adding page,

1. Click RFI Weld VI Request in the Inspection menu.

   The RFI Weld Visual Request page opens.

   

                                             Figure 5.5: RFI Weld Visual Request page

5.5.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Request

If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following steps,

1. In the Sub Contractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date.

    Note: The inspection date should be as current date or upcoming dates. The system will not accept if you have given the previous dates.

3. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list.

4. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list.

5. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list.

6. In the Description box, enter the description for the request.  

   Before saving the added weld VI request, you must add joints for the weld VI request.

   Note: You can add multiple joints for one request.

   The RFI Weld Visual Request page shows a list of joints including the corresponding sheet and piece mark numbers. If you want to add joints for the RFI weld VI request, do the following steps,

   

7. Select the checkbox of the respective joints you want to add.

   The added joints will be moved and listed in the right side of the page.

   

8. Update the welder details by using (Add icon) provided in the Welder Details column.

   1. 1. Click  (Add icon) of the respective joint number.

         The Welder- Weld Layer- Weld Process window opens.  

         

      2. In the Date box, select the date.

      3. In the Group Name box, select the group name from a drop-down list.  

      4. In the Weld Process field, select a weld process.

      5. In the Weld Position field, select the welding position.

      6. In the Weld Layers field, select the weld layers you want add.

      7. In the Welder Number/ Name field, select the welders you want to add.

      8. Click Add.

         The selected welders will be added and listed in the below table. See the above figure.

      9. In the Weld Consumable box, select the weld consumable from a drop-down list.

      10. In the WPS Number box, select the WPS number from a drop-down list.  

      11. Click Save.

          Tip: If you want to remove any added joint, click  (Remove icon) of the respective joint.

9.  Click Save.

The RFI weld VI request is successfully added. If you want to view the added request, navigate to View RFI Weld VI.

5.6 View RFI Weld VI (Heat Numbers)

The View RFI Weld VI tab helps you to view and edit the RFI weld VI request, which is added by using the RFI Weld VI Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI weld VI request.

1. Click View RFI Weld VI in the Inspection menu.

   The Request for Inspection page opens with a list of added RFI weld VI requests.

   

                                      Figure 5.6: Request for Inspection page

5.6.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Request

If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following,

1. Click     (ADD button) in the Request for Inspection page.

   The system redirects you into Request for Inspection page. To know how to add an RFI weld VI request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Weld VI Request”.

Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, you must submit the added request for weld visual inspection.

5.6.2 Add Representative for Added RFI Weld VI Request

If you want to add a representative for any added RFI weld VI request,

1. Click   (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI weld VI request.

   The Edit Form window opens.

   

2. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative.

3. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

5. Click Save.

5.6.3 Edit Any RFI Weld VI Request 

If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI request in the Request for Inspection page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.6.

   The Request for Inspection page opens with the details of the selected RFI weld VI request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.6.4 Submit and Approve an RFI Weld VI Request

Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, the Submission column in the Requests for Inspection page is appeared with   (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.6.

1. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI request, click   (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the RFI weld VI request, the Request Status column in the Request for Inspection page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons).

2.  If you want to approve the RFI weld VI request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request.

The approved request will be moved to for inspection.

5.6.5 Add Results of RFI weld Visual Inspection

After completing the RFI weld visual inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request.

   The Request for Inspection window opens with a list of joints added for the particular request.

   

2.  In the Result column, select the result for each joint from the given result options in the drop-down list.

3. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

4. Click Save.

5.6.6 View an RFI Weld VI Report

If you want to view an RFI weld VI report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page. See Fig 5.6.

5.6.7 View Signature Details of Inspectors

You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the RFI weld visual inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page.

5.6.8 Attach a File into an RFI Weld VI Request 

If you want to attach a file with any existing RFI weld VI request listed in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

5.6.9 Export RFI Weld VI Request List

You can export a list of RFI weld VI requests added in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

5.6.10 Filter RFI Weld VI Request

If you want to filter any specific RFI weld VI request in the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page,

• you can use the filter box provided in the upper side of the RFI Weld Visual Requests List  To filter the any specific RFI weld VI request, select the Drawing Number and Date in the boxes and click Search.
• you can use  (FILTER button) located on the RFI Weld Visual Requests List page. To know how to filter, see the topic ”Filter Any Area”.

5.7 NDT Inspection Generic

NDT inspection used to find out welding defects of the materials. Once the fit up and welding process of the materials has completed, the materials will be moved for the NDT inspection. The currently following NDT inspection methods are RT, UT, MT, PT, Ultrasonic Thickness Gaging (UTG), Magnetic Particle Inspection (MPI) after load test, UT/MT, and PT after load test.

The NDT Inspection Generic tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an NDT inspection generic. If you want to navigate the NDT inspection generic,

1. Click the NDT Inspection Generic in the Inspection menu.

   The NDT Inspection Generic page opens.

   

   

   

                                          Figure 5.7: NDT Inspection Generic page

5.7.1 Add an NDT Inspection Generic 

If you want to add an NDT inspection generic, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the NDT Inspection Generic page.

   A new window opens to add an NDT Inspection generic.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new NDT inspection generic will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

    

2. In the Description box, enter the description for the RFI weld VI generic.

3. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Inspection Date box, choose the date of inspection.

5. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number.

6. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation value.

7. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal value.

8. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done.

9. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list.

10. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail.

11. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail.

12. In the Requisition box, select the type of request from a drop-down list.

13. In the Welding Position box, enter the position of welding.

14. In the Weld Type box, enter the type of welding.

15. In the Thickness box, enter the thickness of the welding.

16. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

17. In the Welder box, select the name of a welder from a drop-down list.

18. In the WPS box, enter the WPS detail.

19. In the Process box, select the welding process to be done from a specified category.

20. In the NDT Type box, select the type of NDT to be done from a specified category.

21. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

22. Click Save. 

The NDT inspection generic is added successfully. Once you have added the NDT inspection generic, you must add the RFI data for the added NDT inspection generic.

5.7.2 Add RFI Data for the Added NDT Inspection Generic

If you want to add RFI data for the added NDT inspection generic, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the NDT Inspection Generic See Fig 5.7.

   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens.  

   

2. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start.

3. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end.

4. In the Inspection Details option, select 1^st Inspection, 2^nd Inspection or 3^rd Inspection according to the inspection details.

5. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details.

6. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference.

7. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date.

8. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected.

9. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

10. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection.  

11. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection.

12. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person.

13. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed.

14. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML.

15. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date.

16. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB.

17. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date.

18. Click Save.  

The RFI data is successfully added.

5.7.3 Print an RFI Report

If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the NDT Inspection Generic page. See Fig 5.7.

5.7.4 Submit an NDT Inspection Generic

Once you have added the NDT inspection generic, the Submission column in the NDT Inspection Generic page is appeared with   (Submit and Reject icons).

If you want to submit the added NDT inspection generic, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

5.7.5 Print an NDT Inspection Generic Report

If you want to print an NDT inspection generic report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the NDT Inspection Generic page. See Fig 5.7.

5.7.6 View Signature Details of QA User, Surveyor, and Client 

Once the NDT inspection has completed, the QA, surveyor, and client add their signature based on their corresponding roles. You can view their signature by using (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the NDT Inspection Generic page.

5.7.7 Attach a File into an NDT Inspection Generic

If you want to attach any file with any NDT inspection generic added in the NDT Inspection Generic page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.7.8 Edit Any NDT Inspection Generic

If you want to edit any existing NDT inspection generic in the NDT Inspection Generic page, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT inspection generic. See Fig 5.7.

   A new window opens to edit the NDT inspection generic.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.7.9 Export NDT Inspection Generic List

You can export a list of NDT inspection generic added in the NDT Inspection Generic page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.7.10 Filter Any NDT Inspection Generic

If you want to filter any NDT inspection generic from the list of NDT inspection generic in the NDT Inspection Generic page, you can use the   (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.8 NDT Inspection Request

The NDT Inspection Request tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an NDT inspection request to perform the NDT inspection.

5.8.1 Add an NDT Inspection Request

If you want to add an NDT inspection request, do the following

1. Click the NDT Inspection Request tab in the Inspection menu.

   A new page opens to add an NDT inspection request.

   

                                        Figure 5.8: NDT Inspection Request page

     Tip: A report number and the request adding date for a new NDT inspection request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the Date boxes, respectively.

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the Requested By box, enter the name of person who has requested for the inspection.  

3. In the To box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

4. In the Attention box, enter any note if you want for attention.

5. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection.

6. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done.

7. In the Designation box, enter the designation detail.

8. In the Cost Centre box, enter the cost centre detail.

9. In the Requisition box, select the type of request from a drop-down list.

10. In the Welding Position box, enter the position of welding.

11. In the Weld Type box, enter the type of welding.

12. In the Thickness box, enter the thickness of the welding.

13. In the NDT Procedure Number, select the NDT procedure number from a drop-down list.  

14. In the Acceptance Criteria box, enter the detail of acceptance criteria.

15. In the Test Specification box, enter the test specification detail.

16. In the Construction Code box, enter the construction code.

17. In the NDT Type box, select any type of NDT you want to add.

18. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

    Note: Before saving the added NDT request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added NDT inspection request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an NDT inspection request”.

19. Click Save.

5.8.2 Add Joints for an NDT Inspection Request

If you want to add joints for any added NDT inspection request, do the following,

1. Click the check box of the respective joints.

2. Click   (Add Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page.

   

The selected joints are successfully added for the NDT inspection request.

5.9 View NDT Request

The View NDT Request tab helps you to view and edit the added NDT inspection request, which is added by using the NDT Inspection Request tab.

1. Click the View NDT Request tab in the Inspection menu.

   The View NDT Inspection List page opens with a list of added NDT inspection requests.  

   

                                            Figure 5.9: View NDT Inspection List page

5.9.1 Change the Inspection Date for Any Added NDT Inspection Request

If you want to change the inspection date of any added NDT inspection request,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Inspection Date column for the respective NDT inspection request, See Fig 5.9.

   The Edit Form window opens.

   

   1. 1. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

      2. Click Save.

5.9.2 Print an NDT Inspection Request Report

If you want to print an NDT inspection request report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the View NDT Inspection List page. See Fig 5.9.

5.9.3 Edit Any NDT Inspection Request 

If you want to edit any existing NDT Inspection request in the View NDT Inspection List page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT inspection request. See Fig 5.9.

   The NDT Inspection Request page opens to edit the NDT Inspection request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.9.4 Export NDT Inspection Request List

You can export a list of NDT inspection request added in the View NDT Inspection List page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.9.5 Filter Any NDT Inspection Request 

If you want to filter any NDT inspection request from the list of NDT inspection requests in the View NDT Inspection List page, you can use the   (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.10  RFI Request for Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT)

PWHT is defined as a heat treatment after welding performed to strengthen the weld metal and heat affected zone. Thus, decreasing hardness and improving toughness, and decreasing the residual stresses associated with welding.

The RFI Request for PWHT tab in the Inspection menu used to add an RFI request for PWHT.

1. Click the RFI Request for PWHT tab in the Inspection menu.

   The RFI Request for PWHT page opens.

   

                                              Figure 5.10: RFI Request for PWHT page

5.10.1 Add an RFI Request for PWHT

If you want to add an RFI request for PWHT, do the following,

1. Click   (ADD button) in the RFI Request for PWHT page. See Fig 5.10.

   A new window opens to add an RFI request for PWHT.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2.  Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

3. In the Location box, enter a location where the inspection to be done.

4. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

5. In the NDT Type box, select PWHT.

6. In the Search Joints List by ISO/ Drawing No box, select a drawing number from a drop-down list.

   The Joint numbers and the piece mark numbers will be listed for the selected drawing number.

7. If you want to add joints, click  (Add icon) of the respective joint number.

   The added joints will be moved into the left side window of the RFI Request for PWHT page.

8. Click Save AFI Request.

   The RFI request for PWHT is successfully added.

5.10.2 Submit and Approve an RFI Request for PWHT

Once you have added the RFI request for PWHT, the Request Status column in the RFI Request for PWHT page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the RFI request for PWHT, click   (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click 

     (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the RFI request for PWHT, the Completed Status column in the RFI Request for PWHT page is appeared with (Accept and Reject icons).

2.  If you want to approve the RFI request for PWHT, click  (Submit icon) in the Completed Status Otherwise click 

     (Reject icon) to reject the request.

5.10.3 Attach a File into an RFI Request for PWHT

If you want to attach any file with any RFI request for PWHT listed in the RFI Request for PWHT page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.10.4 Print an RFI Request for PWHT Report

If you want to print an RFI request for PWHT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RFI Request for PWHT page. See Fig 5.12.

5.10.5 Edit Any RFI Request for PWHT

 If you want to edit any existing RFI request for PWHT in the RFI Request for PWHT page, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI request for PWHT. See Fig 5.10.

   A new window opens to edit the RFI request for PWHT.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save AFI Request.

5.10.6 Export RFI Request for PWHT

You can export a list of RFI request for PWHT added in the RFI Request for PWHT page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.11 NDT Job Order

The NDT Job Order tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add a job order for a specific NDT-contractor to carry out the NDT inspection. Once you have added the job order, you can add the NDT request including the quantity and schedule date to complete the NDT inspection.

If you want to navigate NDT Job Order,

1. Click the NDT Job Order tab in the Inspection menu.

   The Job Order page opens.

   

                                                              Figure 5.11: Job Order page

5.11.1 Add NDT Job Order

If you want to add an NDT job order, do the following,

1. Click    (ADD button) in the Job Order page. See Fig 5.11.

   A new window opens to add an NDT job order.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new job order will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the NDT Contractor box, select the name of an NDT contractor from a drop-down list.

3. In the Attention box, enter any note if you want for attention.

4. In the Date box, select the date of adding an NDT job order.

5. In the Job No box, enter the job number.

6. In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested for an NDT job order.

7. In the Requested Date box, select requested date of an NDT job order.

8. In the Supported By boxes, enter the name of a project lead and a HOD, respectively.

9.  Click Save.

The NDT job order is successfully added.

5.11.2 Add an NDT request 

1. Click (Add icon) of the respective job order in the Add NDT Request column of the Job Order See Fig 5.13.

   A new window shows a list of added NDT request.  

   

2. If you want to add any request, click  (Add icon) of the respective request.

   The added NDT request will be assigned under the respective job order.

3.  If you want to delete any request, click  (Delete icon) of the respective request.

5.11.3 Attach a File into an NDT Job Order 

If you want to attach any file with any NDT job order listed in the Job Order page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.11.4 Print an NDT Job Order Report

If you want to print an NDT job order report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Job Order page. See Fig 5.11.

5.11.5 Edit Any NDT Job Order

 If you want to edit any existing NDT job order in the Job Order page, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT job order. See Fig 5.11.

   A new window opens to edit the job order.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.11.6 Export NDT Job Order List

You can export a list of NDT job order added in the Job Order page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.12 NDT Job Verification

The NDT Job Verification tab helps you to add an NDT job verification request. This tab helps the NDT contractor to verify the quantity of job done based on the request issued. If you want to navigate NDT Job Verification,

1. Click the NDT Job Verification tab in the Inspection menu.

   The Job Verification page opens.

   

                                                       Figure 5.12: Job Verification page

5.12.1 Add NDT Job Verification

If you want to add an NDT job verification, do the following,

1. Click    (ADD button) in the Job Verification page. See Fig 5.12.

   A new window opens to add an NDT job verification request.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new job verification will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the NDT Contractor box, select the name of an NDT contractor from a drop-down list.

3. In the Date box, select the date of adding an NDT job verification request.

4. In the Job No box, enter the job number.

5. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who prepared the NDT job verification request.

6. In the Prepared Date box, select prepared date of the NDT job verification request.

7. In the Checked By box, enter the name of a person who has checked the request.

8. In the Checked Date box, select checked date of the request.

9. In the Verified By box, enter the name of a person who has verified the request.

10.  Click Save.

The NDT job verification request is successfully added.

5.12.2 Attach a File into an NDT Job Verification Request

If you want to attach any file with any NDT job verification request listed in the Job Verification page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.12.3 Print an NDT Job Verification Report

If you want to print an NDT job verification report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Job Verification page. See Fig 5.12.

5.12.4 Edit Any NDT Job Verification Request

 If you want to edit any existing NDT job verification request in the Job Verification page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT job verification request. See Fig 5.12.

   A new window opens to edit the job order.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.12.5 Export NDT Job Verification Request List

You can export a list of NDT job verification request added in the Job Verification page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.13 Survey form

The Survey form tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a survey form. To navigate the Survey form,

1. Click the Survey form tab in the Inspection menu.

   The Survey form page opens.

   

                                                 Figure 5.13: Survey form page

5.13.1 Add a Survey Form

If you want to add a survey form, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Survey form page. See Fig 5.13.

   A new window opens to add a survey form.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the Report Number box, enter the report number of the survey form.

3. In the Request Date box, select the request date of the survey form.

4. In the Part Number box, enter the part number for the survey form.

5. In the Part Description box, enter the description for the added part number.

6. In the Inspection Request Date box, select the inspection request date.

7. In the Location box, enter the location where the inspection to be done.

8. In the Batch Number box, enter the batch number for the survey form.

9. In the Drawing Number box, enter the drawing number for the survey form.

10. In the Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) Document Number box, enter ITP document number.

11. In the Section / Clause Number box, enter the section / clause number.

12. In the Reference Number box, enter the reference number.

13. In the Report Number box, enter the report number.  

14. In the Report Number box, enter the report number.  

15. In the Type of Inspection option, select the required inspection types from the given inspection type list.

16.  Click Save.

The survey form is successfully added.

5.13.2 Attach a File into a Survey Form

If you want to attach any file with any survey form added in the Survey form page,  follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.13.3 Submit and Approve a Survey Form

Once you have added the surveyor, the Submission column in the Survey form page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the survey form, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the survey form.

   Once you have submitted the survey form, the Approval column in the Survey form page is appeared with  (Accept and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the survey form, click (Submit icon) in the Approval Otherwise click   (Reject icon) to reject the survey form.

5.13.4 Print a Structural Survey Report

If you want to print a structural survey report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Survey form page. See Fig 5.13.

5.13.5 Edit Any Survey Form

 If you want to edit any existing survey form in the Survey form page, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective survey form. See Fig 5.13.

   A new window opens to edit the survey form.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.13.6 Export Survey Form List

You can export a list of survey forms added in the Survey Form page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.14 Dimensional Inspection Request

The Dimensional Inspection Request tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a dimensional inspection request. To navigate to the dimensional inspection request adding page,

1. Click Dimensional Inspection Request in the Inspection menu.

   The Dimensional Inspection Request page opens.

   

                                    Figure 5.14: Dimensional Inspection Request page

5.14.1 Add a Dimensional Inspection Request

If you want to add a new dimensional inspection request, do the following steps.  

1. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of dimensional inspection.

2. In the Location box, select the location where the dimensional inspection to be performed.

   Before saving the added dimensional inspection request, you must add spools. You can add multiple spools for one dimensional inspection request.

    Note: The page shows a list of added spools. If you want to view the specific spools, use the filter options provided in the System, Line Number, Drawing Number, and Spool Number columns.

3.  Click  (Add icon) of the respective spool which you want to add.

   The added spools will be moved to the right side of the page.

4. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

5. In the Inspection Item box, enter the details of inspection items.

6. Click Save.

The dimensional inspection request will be added and listed in the Dimensional Inspection List page.

5.15 Dimensional Inspection List

The Dimensional Inspection List tab helps you to view and edit the dimensional inspection request, which is added by using the Dimensional Inspection Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new dimensional inspection request.

1. Click Dimensional Inspection List in the Inspection menu.

   The Dimensional Inspection List page opens with a list of added dimensional inspection requests.  

   

                                         Figure 5.15: Dimensional Inspection List page

5.15.1 Add a Dimensional Inspection Request

If you want to add a dimensional inspection request, do the following steps,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Dimensional Inspection List page.

   The system redirects you into the Dimensional Inspection Request page. To know how to add a dimensional inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Dimensional Inspection Request”.

Once you have added the dimensional inspection request, you must submit the added request to perform the dimensional inspection.

5.15.2 Add Representative for Added Dimensional Inspection Request

If you want to add a representative for any added dimensional inspection request,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective spool release request.

   The Edit Form window opens.

   

2.  In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

3. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative.

4. Click Save.

5.15.3 Edit Any Dimensional Inspection Request 

If you want to edit any existing dimensional inspection request in the Dimensional Inspection List page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective dimensional inspection request. See Fig 5.15.

   The page opens with the details of the selected dimensional inspection request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.15.4 Submit a Dimensional Inspection Request

Once you have added the dimensional inspection request, the Request Status column in the Dimensional Inspection List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.15.

1. If you want to submit the dimensional inspection request, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

The submitted request will be moved to for the dimensional inspection.

5.15.5 Add Results of Dimensional Inspection

After completing the dimensional inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request.

   The Dimensional Inspection List window opens with a list of added spools.

   

2. In the Result column, select the result for each spool from the given result options.

3. In the Pipe Size column, select the result of pipe size.

4. In the Dimension column, select the result of pipe dimension.

5. In the Flange column, select the result of flange.

6. In the Orientation column, select the result of orientation.   

7.  In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

8. Click Save.

5.15.6 View a Dimensional Inspection Report

If you want to view a dimensional inspection report, click  (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Dimensional Inspection List page. See Fig 5.15.

5.15.7 Attach a File into a Dimensional Inspection Request 

If you want to attach a file with an existing dimensional inspection request listed in the Dimensional Inspection List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

5.15.8 Export Dimensional Inspection Request List

You can export a list of dimensional inspection requests added in the Dimensional Inspection List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

5.15.9 Filter Dimensional Inspection Request

If you want to filter any dimensional inspection request in the Dimensional Inspection List page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Dimensional Inspection List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.16 Inspection Release Note

The Inspection Release Note tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add an inspection release note. If you want to navigate the inspection release note adding page,

1. Click Inspection Release Note in the Inspection menu.

   The Inspection Release Note page opens.

   

                                      Figure 5.16: Inspection Release Note page

5.16.1 Add an Inspection Release Note 

If you want to add an inspection release note, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Inspection Release Note page.

   A new window opens to add an Inspection release note.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

3. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date and time of inspection.

4. In the Location box, select a location where the inspection to be held.

5. In the System/Area box, enter the name of area/system.

6. In the Sub System No box, enter the sub system number.

7. In the Item to be Released field, select the detail of the item to be released that is whether Piping or Structural. If another item means select the checkbox of Others and enter the item detail.
8. In the Item to be Released for field, select the reason of the item to be released for that is whether for Pressure Test or Blasting & Painting. If any other reason means select the checkbox of Others and enter the reason.

9. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number.

10. In the Revision box, enter the revision for the weld map drawing.

11. In the Description box, enter the description for the weld map drawing.

12. In the Quantity box, enter the quantity of the weld map drawing.

13. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

14. Click Update.

    The weld map drawing is updated.

15. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the inspection release note.

16. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the inspection release note.

17. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the inspection release note.

18. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the inspection release note.
19. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the inspection release note.
20. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the inspection release note.

21. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

22. Click Send Request.

The inspection release will be added and listed in the Inspection Release Note page. 

5.16.2 Add RFI Data for the Added Inspection Release Note

If you want to add RFI data for the added inspection release note, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Inspection Release Note See Fig 5.16.

   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens.  

   

2. In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start.

3. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end.

4. In the Inspection Details option, select 1^st Inspection, 2^nd Inspection or 3^rd Inspection according to the inspection details.

5. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details.

6. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference.

7. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date.

8. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected.

9. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

10. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection.  

11. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection.

12. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person.

13. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed.

14. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML.

15. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date.

16. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB.

17. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date.

18. Click Save.  

The RFI data is successfully added.

5.16.3 Submit and Approve an NDT Inspection Generic

Once you have added the inspection release note, the Submission column in the Inspection Release Note page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the inspection release note, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the inspection release note, the Request Status column in the Inspection Release Note page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the inspection release note, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request. 

    

5.16.4 Print an RFI Report

If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the Inspection Release Note page. See Fig 5.16.

5.16.5 Print an Inspection Release Note

If you want to print an inspection release note, click  (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Inspection Release Note page. See Fig 5.16.

5.16.6 Attach a File into an Inspection Release Note

If you want to attach a file with an inspection release note added in the Inspection Release Note page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.16.7 Edit Any Inspection Release Note

If you want to edit any existing inspection release note in the Inspection Release Note page, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective NDT inspection generic. See Fig 5.16.

   A new window opens to edit the inspection release note.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.16.8 Export Inspection Release Note List

You can export a list of inspection release notes added in the Inspection Release Note page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.17 Blasting and Painting Inspection Report

The Blasting and Painting Inspection Report tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a blasting and painting inspection report. If you want to navigate the blasting and painting inspection report adding page,

1. Click Blasting and Painting Inspection Report in the Inspection menu.

   The Blasting and Painting Inspection List page opens.

   

                                   Figure 5.17: Blasting and Painting Inspection List page

5.17.1 Add a Blasting and Painting Inspection Report

If you want to add a blasting and painting inspection report, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page.

   A new window opens to add the blasting and painting inspection report details.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

2.  In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

3. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date and time of inspection.

4. In the Location box, select a location where the inspection to be held.

5. In the Paint System No box, enter the paint system number.

6. In the System/Area box, enter the name of area/system.

7. In the Sub System No box, enter the sub system number.

   Before saving the blasting and painting inspection report, you must add the weld map drawing detail.

8. Click   (ADD button) in the Weld Map Drawing Detail window.

   The Edit Form window shows a new window to add the details of weld map drawing.  

   

9. In the Weld Map Drawing No box, enter the weld map drawing number.

10. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number.

11. In the Revision box, enter the revision for the weld map drawing.

12. In the Description box, enter the description for the weld map drawing.

13. In the Quantity box, enter the quantity of the weld map drawing.

14. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

15. Click Update.

    The weld map drawing is updated.

16. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the blasting and painting inspection report.

17. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the blasting and painting inspection report.

18. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the blasting and painting inspection report.

19. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the blasting and painting inspection report.

20. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the blasting and painting inspection report.

21. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the blasting and painting inspection report.

22. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

23. Click Send Request.

The blasting and painting inspection report will be added and listed in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. 

5.17.2 Add RFI Data for the Added Blasting and Painting Inspection Report

If you want to add RFI data for the added blasting and painting inspection report, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List See Fig 5.17.

   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens.  

   

2.  In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start.

3. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end.

4. In the Inspection Details option, select 1^stInspection, 2^nd Inspection or 3^rd Inspection according to the inspection details.

5. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details.

6. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference.

7. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date.

8. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected.

9. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

10. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection.  

11. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection.

12. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person.

13. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed.

14. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML.

15. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date.

16. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB.

17. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date.

18. Click Save. 

The RFI data is successfully added.

5.17.3 The RFI data is successfully added.

Once you have added the blasting and painting inspection report, the Submission column in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the blasting and painting inspection report, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the blasting and painting inspection report, the Request Status column in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the blasting and painting inspection report, click  (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have approved the blasting and painting inspection report, the Result column will be enabled with  (Add icon) to add the blasting and painting inspection results.

   

517.4 Add Blasting and Painting Inspection Results

If you want to add the blasting and painting inspection results,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Result column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page.

   The page shows a new window.

   

2. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column.

   The page shows the Surface Preparation, Paint Preparation, and Paint Application windows.

   

3. In the Surface Profile Height box, enter the surface profile height value.

4. In the Cleaning Method box, enter the cleaning method detail.

5. In the Surface Cleanliness box, select the surface cleanliness level.

6. In the Abrasive Manufacturer box, enter the abrasive manufacturer detail.

7. In the Abrasive Type box, enter the type name of abrasive.

8. In the Abrasive Grade box, enter the grade level of abrasive.

9. In the Date & Time box, select the date and time.

10. Click Save.

11. In the Paint Preparation window, enter the detail of 1^st coat, 2^nd coat and 3^rd coat in the respective columns.

12. Click Save changes.

13. In the Airless Spray box, enter the airless spray method detail.

14. In the Conventional Spray box, enter the conventional spray method detail.

15. In the Roller/Brush box, enter the roller/brush detail.

16. Click Save.

17. In the Paint Application window, enter the detail of 1^st coat, 2^nd coat and 3^rd coat in the respective columns.

18. Click Save changes.

19. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection.

20. In the 1^st Coat Date & Time box, select the date and time of 1^st coat.

21. In the 2^nd Coat Date & Time box, select the date and time of 2^nd coat.

22. In the 3^rd Coat Date & Time box, select the date and time of 3^rd coat.

23. Click Save.

5.17.5 Print an RFI Report

If you want to print an RFI report, click  (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. See Fig 5.17.

5.17.6 Print a Blasting and Painting Inspection Report

If you want to print a blasting and painting inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page. See Fig 5.17.

5.17.7 Attach a File into a Blasting and Painting Inspection Report

If you want to attach a file with a blasting and painting inspection report added in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.17.8 Edit Any Blasting and Painting Inspection Report

If you want to edit any existing blasting and painting inspection report in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective blasting and painting inspection report. See Fig 5.17.

   A new window opens to edit the blasting and painting inspection report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.17.9 Export Blasting and Painting Inspection Report List

You can export a list of blasting and painting inspection reports added in the Blasting and Painting Inspection List page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.18 Painting and Coating Final Inspection Report

The Painting and Coating FIR tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add a painting and coating inspection report. If you want to navigate the painting and coating inspection report adding page,

1. Click Painting and Coating FIR in the Inspection menu.

   The Painting and Coating FIR page opens.

   

                                          Figure 5.18: Painting and Coating FIR page

5.18.1 Add a Painting and Coating FIR 

If you want to add a painting and coating FIR, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Painting and Coating FIR page.

   A new window opens to add the painting and coating inspection report details.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    

2. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.
3. In the Sub Contractor Name box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

4. In the Location box, select the location where the painting and coating inspection to be performed.  

5. In the Reference Drawing box, select a reference drawing from a drop-down list.

6. In the System box, select a system from a drop-down list.

7. In the No of Coat Applied box, enter the number of applied coating.

8. In the Shift box, enter the shift detail.

9. In the Specification box, enter the specification detail.

10. In the Job/Item Description box, enter the description for the job/item.

11. In the Painted Surface box, enter the painted surface detail.

12. In the Client Paint Specification box, enter the client paint specification detail.

13. In the Surface Preparation box, enter the surface preparation detail.

14. In the Painting/Coating Type box, enter the painting/coating type.

15. In the Visual Inspection box, enter the visual inspection detail.

16. In the Top Coat D.F.T box, enter the top coat detail.

17. In the Degree of Cured box, enter the degree of cured.

18. In the Pinhole Testing box, enter the pinhole testing detail.

19. In the Wet Sponge Method box, enter the wet sponge method detail.

20. In the Holiday Detection box, enter the holiday detection detail.

21. In the Brush Coil box, enter the brush coil detail.

22. In the K.V Setting (For Pipeline) box, enter the K.V setting detail for pipeline.

    Before saving the painting and coating inspection report, you must add the weld map drawing detail.

23. Click (ADD button) in the Weld Map Drawing Detail

    The Edit Form window shows a new window to add the details of weld map drawing.  

    

     
24.  In the Weld Map Drawing No box, enter the weld map drawing number.

25. In the Sheet No box, enter the sheet number.

26. In the Revision box, enter the revision for the weld map drawing.

27. In the Description box, enter the description for the weld map drawing.

28. In the Quantity box, enter the quantity of the weld map drawing.

29. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

30. Click Update.

    The weld map drawing is updated.

31. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the painting and coating inspection report.

32. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the painting and coating inspection report.

33. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the painting and coating inspection report.
34. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the painting and coating inspection report.
35. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the painting and coating inspection report.
36. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the painting and coating inspection report.

37. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

38. Click Send Request.

The painting and coating inspection report will be added and listed in the Painting and Coating FIR page. 

5.18.2 Add RFI Data for the Added Painting and Coating FIR

If you want to add RFI data for the added painting and coating inspection report, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the RFI Data column of the Painting and Coating FIR page. See Fig 5.18.

   The RFI Inspection Request List window opens.

   

2.  In the Inspection From box, enter the detail from where the inspection should start.

3. In the Inspection To box, enter the detail to where the inspection should end.

4. In the Inspection Details option, select 1^stInspection, 2^nd Inspection or 3^rd Inspection according to the inspection details.

5. In the Others box, enter any other inspection related details.

6. In the Refer to Report No box, enter the report number for reference.

7. In the RFI Date box, choose the RFI date.

8. In the Inspection Result option, if the inspection result is accepted, select Accepted otherwise select Rejected.
9.  In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

10. In the Inspected by box, enter the name of a person who has done inspection.  

11. In the Inspected Date box, choose the date of inspection.

12. In the Witnessed By box, enter the name of the witnessed person.

13. In the Witnessed Date box, choose the date of witnessed.

14. In the PCML Rep Name box, enter the representative name of PCML.

15. In the PCML Rep Date box, choose the PCML rep date.

16. In the MEB Rep Name box, enter the representative name of MEB.

17. In the MEB Rep Date box, choose MEB rep date.

18. Click Save.  

The RFI data is successfully added.

5.18.3 Submit and Approve a Painting and Coating FIR 

Once you have added the painting and coating inspection report, the Submission column in the Painting and Coating FIR page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the painting and coating inspection report, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the painting and coating inspection report, the Request Status column in the Painting and Coating FIR page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the painting and coating inspection report, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

5.18.4 Print an RFI report

If you want to print an RFI report, click (print icon) provided in the RFI Report column of the Painting and Coating FIR page. See Fig 5.18.

5.18.5 Print a Painting and Coating FIR

If you want to print a painting and coating inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Painting and Coating FIR page. See Fig 5.18.

5.18.6 Attach a File into a Painting and Coating Inspection Report

If you want to attach a file with a painting and coating inspection report added in the Painting and Coating FIR page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.18.7 Edit Any Painting and Coating FIR

If you want to edit any existing painting and coating inspection report in the Painting and Coating FIR page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective painting and coating inspection report. See Fig 5.18.

   A new window opens to edit the painting and coating inspection report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.18.8 Export Painting and Coating FIR list

You can export a list of painting and coating inspection reports added in the Painting and Coating FIR page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.18.9 Filter Painting and Coating FIR

If you want to filter any specific painting and blasting inspection request in the Painting and Coating FIR page, you can filter the request based on the Spool No filter box.  

5.19 RFI Hydro Pressure

Hydro Pressure Inspection is the technique in which pipes used in the structural project, are tested at required design pressure of the pipes to check the leak and strength. You can add a request for hydro pressure inspection by using the RFI Hydro Pressure tab in the Inspection menu.

5.19.1 Add an RFI Hydro Pressure Request

If you want to add an RFI hydro pressure request, do the following steps,

1. Click RFI Hydro Pressure in the Inspection menu.

   The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens.

   

                                               Figure 5.19: RFI Hydro Pressure page

2. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the inspection date and time.

3. In the Description box, enter the description for the hydro pressure inspection.

4. In the Drawing No box, select a drawing number.

5. In the System box, select a system.

6. In the Test Type box, select a test type.

7. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure value.

8. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure value.

9. In the Classification box, enter the classification detail.

10. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time range.

11. In the Test Medium box, enter the test medium detail.

12. In the Job Code box, enter the job code.

13. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

    Before saving the added NDT request, you must add the pressure gauge details.

14. Click (ADD button) in the Pressure Gauge Details window.

    

15. In the Type of Test box, select a type of test.

16. In the Description box, enter the description detail.

17. In the Serial No box, enter the serial number.

18. In the Certificate No box, enter the certificate number.

19. In the Calibration Date box, select the calibration date.

20. In the Expiry Date box, select the expiry date.  

21. Click Save Request.

The hydro pressure inspection request will be added and listed in the RFI Hydro Pressure page.

5.20 View RFI Hydro Pressure

The View RFI Hydro Pressure tab helps you to view and edit the hydro pressure inspection request, which is added by using the RFI Hydro Pressure tab. This tab also allows you to add a new hydro pressure request.

1. Click View RFI Hydro Pressure in the Inspection menu.

   The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens with a list of added hydro pressure requests.  

   

                                                    Figure 5.20: RFI Hydro Pressure page

5.20.1 Add a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request

If you want to add a hydro pressure inspection request, do the following steps,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the RFI Hydro Pressure page.

   The system redirects you to a new page to add a new hydro pressure inspection request. To know how to add a hydro pressure inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request”.

The system redirects you to a new page to add a new hydro pressure inspection request. To know how to add a hydro pressure inspection request, See the topic, “Add a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request”.

5.20.2 Edit Any Existing Hydro Pressure Inspection Request 

If you want to edit any existing hydro pressure inspection request in the RFI Hydro Pressure page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective hydro pressure inspection request. See Fig 5.20.

   The RFI Hydro Pressure page opens with the details of the selected hydro pressure inspection request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.20.3 Submit and Approve a Hydro Pressure Inspection Request

Once you have added the hydro pressure inspection request, the Submission column in the RFI Hydro Pressure page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the hydro pressure inspection request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the hydro pressure inspection request, the Request Status column in the RFI Hydro Pressure page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the hydro pressure inspection request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

The hydro pressure inspection request will be moved for hydro pressure inspection.

5.20.4 View a Hydro Pressure Inspection Report

If you want to view a hydro pressure inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the RFI Hydro Pressure page. See Fig 5.20.

5.20.5 Attach a File into a hydro pressure inspection Request 

If you want to attach a file with any existing hydro pressure inspection request listed in the RFI Hydro Pressure page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

5.20.6 View Signature Details of Inspectors

You can view the sign details of the inspectors such as QA, Sub contractor, Client, and Owner, once they completed the hydro pressure inspection and submitted the inspection result details including their signature. To view the signature details, click (Sign icon) in the Sign Details column in the RFI Hydro Pressure page.

5.20.7 Export Hydro Pressure Inspection Request List

You can export a list of hydro pressure requests added in the RFI Hydro Pressure page in both the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

5.20.8 Filter Hydro Pressure Inspection Request

If you want to filter any specific hydro pressure inspection request in the RFI Hydro Pressure page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the RFI Hydro Pressure page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.21 RFI Mechanical Completion Request

Mechanical completion takes place through all phases of the piping project, starting at equipment supplier and continuing through fabrication up to commissioning phase. Mechanical completion encompasses all disciplines. If you want to add an RFI mechanical completion request,

1. Click RFI Mechanical Completion Request in the Inspection menu.

   The RFI Mechanical Completion Request page opens.

   

                                    Figure 5.21: RFI Mechanical Completion Request page

5.21.1 Add an RFI Mechanical Completion Request

If you want to add an RFI mechanical completion request, do the following steps,

1. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

2. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

3. In the Location box, enter the name of the location.

   Before saving the added RFI mechanical completion request, you must add a system. You can add multiple system for one request.

    Note: The page shows a list of added systems. If you want to view the specific system, use the filter options provided in the System, Sub System, Drawing Number, Equipment Number and Check Records columns.

4. Select  (Add icon) of the respective system which you want to add.

   The added system will be moved into the right side of the page.

5. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

6. In the Description box, enter the description for the request.

7. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail.

8. Click Save.

The RFI mechanical completion request will be added and listed in the View RFI Mechanical Completion page.

5.22 View RFI Mechanical Completion 

The View RFI Mechanical Completion tab helps you to view and edit the RFI mechanical completion request, which is added by using the RFI Mechanical Completion Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI mechanical completion request.

1. Click View RFI Mechanical Completion in the Inspection menu.

   The View RFI Mechanical Completion List page opens with a list of added RFI mechanical completion requests.  

   

                                       Figure 5.22: View RFI Mechanical Completion List page

5.22.1 Add an RFI Mechanical Completion Request

If you want to add an RFI mechanical completion request, do the following steps,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page.

   The system redirects you to a new page to add a new RFI mechanical completion request. To know how to add an RFI mechanical completion request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Mechanical Completion Request”.

Once you have added the RFI mechanical completion request, you must submit the added request to perform mechanical completion inspection.

5.22.2 Edit Any RFI Mechanical Completion Request 

If you want to edit any existing mechanical completion request in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI mechanical completion request. See Fig 5.22.

   The RFI Mechanical Completion Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI mechanical completion request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.22.3 Submit and Approve an RFI Mechanical Completion Request

Once you have added the RFI mechanical completion request, the Submission column in the RFI Mechanical Completion Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the mechanical completion request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the mechanical completion request, the Request Status column in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page is appeared with  (Approve and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the mechanical completion request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   The mechanical completion request will be moved for mechanical completion inspection.

5.22.4 Add Results of Mechanical Completion Inspection

After completing the mechanical completion inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request.

   The Result window opens a list of test pack added for the particular request.

   

2.  In the Result column, select the result of each test pack from the given result options in the drop-down list.

3. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any.

4. Click Approve All & Save.

5.22.5 View a Mechanical Completion Inspection Report

If you want to view a mechanical completion inspection report, click   (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. See Fig 5.22.

5.22.6 Attach a File into a Mechanical Completion inspection Request 

If you want to attach a file with any existing mechanical completion inspection request listed in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

5.22.7 Export Mechanical Completion Inspection Request List

You can export a list of mechanical completion inspection requests added in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using   (PDF button) and     (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”

5.22.8 Filter Any Mechanical Completion Inspection Request

If you want to filter any specific mechanical completion inspection request in the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Mechanical Completion List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.23 RFI Static Commissioning 

Static Commissioning take place when Mechanical completion is completed for a system or part of a system. If you want to add an RFI static commissioning request,

1. Click RFI Static Commissioning in the Inspection menu.

   The RFI Static Commissioning Request page opens.

   

                                     Figure 5.23: RFI Static Commissioning Request page

8.23.1 Add an RFI Static Commissioning Request

If you want to add an RFI static commissioning request, do the following steps,

1. In the Sub Contractor box, select a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

2. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

3. In the Location box, enter the name of the location.

   Before saving the added RFI static commissioning request, you must add a system. You can add multiple systems for one request.

   Note: The page shows a list of added systems. If you want to view the specific system, use the filter options provided in the System, Sub System, Drawing Number, Equipment Number and Check Records columns.

4.  Select the checkbox of the respective system which you want to add.

   The added systems will be moved into the right side of the page.

5. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

6. In the Description box, enter the description for the request.

7. In the Work Scope box, enter the work scope detail.

8. Click Save.

The RFI mechanical completion request will be added and listed in the View RFI Static Commissioning page.

5.24 View RFI Static Commissioning

The View RFI Static Commissioning tab helps you to view and edit the RFI static commissioning request, which is added by using the RFI Static Commissioning tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI static commissioning request.

1. Click View RFI Static Commissioning in the Inspection menu.

   The View RFI Static Commissioning List page opens with a list of added RFI static commissioning requests.  

   

                               Figure 5.24: View RFI Static Commissioning List page

5.24.1 Add an RFI Static Commissioning Request

If you want to add an RFI static commissioning request, do the following steps,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page.

   The system redirects you to a new page to add a new RFI static commissioning request. To know how to add an RFI static commissioning request, See the topic, “Add an RFI Static Commissioning Request”.

Once you have added the RFI static commissioning request, you must submit the added request to perform the static commissioning.

5.24.2 Edit Any RFI Static Commissioning Request 

If you want to edit any existing static commissioning request in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI static commissioning request. See Fig 5.24.

   The RFI Static Commissioning Request page opens with the details of the selected RFI request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.24.3 Submit and Approve an RFI Static Commissioning Request

Once you have added the RFI static commissioning request, the Submission column in the RFI Static Commissioning Request page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the static commissioning request, click (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click   (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the static commissioning request, the Request Status column in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page is appeared with (Approve and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the static commissioning request, click (Approve icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click  (Reject icon) to reject the request.

The static commissioning request will be moved for static commissioning inspection.

5.24.4 Add Results of Static Commissioning Inspection

After completing the static commissioning inspection for the added request, you can add the inspection result details. To add results, do the following steps,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective request.

   The Result window opens a list of system added for the particular request.

   

2. In the Result column, select the result of each system from the given result options in the drop-down list.

3. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any.

4. Click Approve All & Save.

5.24.5 View a Static Commissioning Inspection Report

If you want to view a static commissioning inspection report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the View RFI Static Commissioning List page. See Fig 5.24.

5.24.6 Attach a File into a Static Commissioning Inspection Request 

If you want to attach a file with any existing static commissioning inspection request listed in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

5.24.7 Export Static Commissioning Inspection Request List

You can export a list of static commissioning inspection requests added in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page in both the pdf and excel formats by using PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

5.24.8 Filter Any Static Commissioning Inspection Request

If you want to filter any specific static commissioning inspection request in the View RFI Static Commissioning List page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the View RFI Static Commissioning List page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.25 Weekly Welders Performance Record

The Weekly Welders Performance Record tab in the Inspection menu helps you to view the welders performance record on a weekly basis. To view the report,

1. Click Weekly Welders Performance Record in the Inspection menu.

   The Weekly Welders Performance Record page opens.

   

                           Figure 5.25: Weekly Welders Performance Record page

2.  If you want to view the weekly welders performance record for all project, select the checkbox of the All Project option.

3. In the NDT Type box, select an NDT type.

4. In the Joint Category box, select a joint category.

5. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates.

6. Click Show Report.

5.25.1 Print Weekly Welders Performance Record

If you want to print a weekly welders performance record, use and  (print icons) provided in the Weekly Welders Performance Record page.

1. If you want to print the current page of the weekly welders performance record, click (print icon including the page number).
2. If you want to print all the pages of the weekly welders performance record, click (print icon).

5.25.2 View Weekly Welders Performance Record 

You can view the weekly welders performance record in various formats by using the option   provided in the upper right corner of the Weekly Welders Performance Record page.

5.26 RFI Fit up Request (Unique Numbers)

The RFI Fit up Request tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add an RFI fit up request to check the fit-up quality of pipes and joints used in the structural project by a sub-contractor.

5.26.1 Add an RFI Fit up Request

If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following

1. Click the RFI Fit up Request tab in the Inspection menu.

   A new page opens to add an RFI fit up request.

   

                                  Figure 5.26: A page for adding an RFI fit up request

    Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new RFI fit up request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively.

2. In the Sub Contractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

3. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection.

4. In the Location box, enter the location detail.

5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection.

   Note: Before saving the added RFI fit up request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added fit up request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an RFI fit up request”.

6. Click Save.

5.26.2 Add Joints for an RFI Fit up Request

This page shows a list of joints for the corresponding weld map drawing. If you want to add joints for any added RFI Fit up request, do the following,

1. In the Weld Map Drawing box, select a weld map drawing number from a drop-down list.

   A list of joints including the piece mark numbers opens for the selected weld map drawing.

2. Click the check box of the respective joints.

3. Click  (Add Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page.

   

4.  To update WPS number and unique number for the added joints, do one of the following steps,

   1. 1. If you want to update the WPS number for any joint, click the WPS Number column for the respective joint and then select the WPS number from a drop-down list.

         

      2. Enter the unique number for the corresponding joint number in the respective Unique Number column.

         Note: If you want to update the same WPS number of first joint to other joints, click  (Update WPS No button). The WPS number for the first joint will be updated for other joints.

5. If you want to update the WPS number, unique number, piece mark number details together, do the following,

   1. 1. Click (TEMPLATE button) on the Added Joints box.

         An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a pre-defined template. The template contains a list of added joints.

         

      2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

      3. Once you have added the WPS, piece mark and other details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

      4. Click (IMPORT button).

         A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

         

      5. Click   (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

      6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

      7. Click   (Upload button) to export the joint details that are included in the excel worksheet.  

         The details of the joints in the worksheet will be updated.

      8. Click Save.

         The RFI Fit up request is successfully added and moved to the View RFI Fit up tab.

5.27  View RFI Fit up (Unique Numbers)

The View RFI Fit up tab helps you to view and edit the RFI fit up request, which added by using the RFI Fit up Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI fit up request.

1. Click the View RFI Fit up tab in the Inspection menu.

   The REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page opens with a list of added RFI fit up requests.  

   

                                               Figure 5.27: Request for Inspection page

5.27.1 Add an RFI Fit up Request

If you want to add an RFI fit up request, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page.

   A new page opens to add an RFI fit up request. To know how to add an RFI fit up request, see the topic, “Add an RFI fit up request”.

Once you have added the RFI fit up request, you must submit the added request for inspection.

5.27.2 Submit an RFI Fit up Request

Once you have added the RFI fit up request, the Request Status column in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.27.

1. If you want to submit the RFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

5.27.3 Add a Representative for Any RFI Fit up Request

If you want to add a representative for any added RFI fit up request,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI fit up request.

   The Edit Form window opens.

   

2. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative.

3. Click Save.

5.27.4 Print an RFI Fit up Report

If you want to print an RFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page. See Fig 5.27.

5.27.5 Add Result Details of RFI Fit up Inspection

If you want to add the inspection results details of an added RFI fit up inspection request, do the following,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page.

   The Joint Details window opens.

   

2. If you want to check and update the joint details automatically, click  (Check and update button).

3. If you want to update the joint details manually, do the following steps, 
   1. 1. Click the respective number in the WPS Number column and change the WPS number from a drop-down list.
      2. Click the respective number in the Unique Number column and change the unique number from a drop-down list.

      3. Click Save changes.

5.27.6 Attach a File into an RFI Fit up Request 

If you want to attach any file with any RFI fit up request listed in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.27.7 Edit Any RFI Fit up Request 

If you want to edit any existing RFI fit up request in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI fit up request. See Fig 5.27.

   The page shows the added details of the RFI fit up request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.
3. Click Save.

5.27.8 Export RFI Fit up Request List

You can export a list of RFI fit up request added in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.27.9 Filter Any RFI Fit up Request 

If you want to filter any RFI fit up request from the list of RFI fit up requests in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, you can use  the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.28 View Application for Inspection (AFI) Fit up (Unique Numbers)

The View AFI Fit up allows you to add a new AFI fit up request. This tab also helps you to view and edit the added AFI fit up request.

1. Click the View AFI Fit up tab in the Inspection menu.

   The INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page opens.  

   

                                   Figure 5.28: INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page

5.28.1 Add an AFI Fit up Request

If you want to add an AFI fit up request, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page.

   The AFI Request page opens to add an AFI fit up request.

   

    Tip: A report number and RFI number for a new AFI fit up request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and RFI Number boxes.

2. In the Representative (AI) box, enter representative name for the application inspection and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively.

3. In the Representative (Client) box, enter representative name from the client and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively.

4. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

5. In the Representative (Contractor) box, enter representative name from the contractor and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively.

6. In the Activity Code As Per ITP box, select the activity code as per ITP from a drop-down list.

7. In the Activity Code As Per Client box, select the activity code as per client from a drop-down list.

8. In the Location box, enter the location detail.

9. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection.

10. In the Inspection Item box, enter the details of items to be inspected.

11. In the Subject Coverage box, enter the subject coverage detail.

12. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any.

     Note: Before saving the added AFI fit up request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added fit up request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an AFI fit up request”.

13.  Click Save.

5.28.2 Add Joints for an AFI Fit up Request

If you want to add joints for any added AFI fit up request, do the following,

Once you enter the details to add an AFI fit up request, a list of joints including the joint numbers, sheet numbers, and drawing numbers opens.

1. Click the check box of the respective joints.

2. Click (Add Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page.

   

3. Click Save.

The selected joints are successfully added for the AFI fit up request.

Once you have added the RFI fit up request, you must submit the added request for inspection.

5.28.3 Submit an AFI Fit up Request

Once you have added the AFI fit up request, the Request Status column in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.28.

1. If you want to submit the AFI fit up request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

5.28.4 Change the Added Representative for Any AFI Fit up Request

If you want to change the added representative for any AFI fit up request,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective AFI fit up request.

   The Edit Form window opens.

   

2. In the Representative box, edit the name of a representative.

3. Click Save.

5.28.5  Print an AFI Fit up Report

If you want to print an AFI fit up report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page. See Fig 5.28.

5.28.6 Add Result Details of AFI Fit up Inspection

If you want to update results for the AFI fit up inspection request, do the following,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page.

   A new window opens.

   

2. In the Result column, select the results of AFI inspection from a drop-down list, for the respective drawing and joint numbers.

3. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any.   

4. Click Save.

5.28.7 Attach a File into an AFI Fit up Request 

If you want to attach any file with any AFI fit up request listed in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.28.8 Edit Any AFI Fit up Request 

If you want to edit any existing AFI fit up request in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective AFI fit up request. See Fig 5.28.

   The page shows the added details of the AFI fit up request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.28.9 Export AFI Fit up Request List

You can export a list of AFI fit up request added in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.28.10 Filter Any AFI Fit up Request 

If you want to filter any AFI fit up request from the list of AFI fit up requests in the INSPECTION REQUEST (AFI) page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.29 RFI Weld VI Request (Unique Numbers)

The RFI Weld VI Request tab in the Inspection menu allows you to add an RFI weld VI request to perform visual inspection of welded pipes and joints used in the structural project by a sub-contractor.

5.29.1 Add an RFI weld VI request

If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following,

1. Click the RFI Weld VI Request tab in the Inspection menu.

   The REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page opens to add an RFI weld VI request.

   

                                    Figure 5.29: REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page

   Tip: A report number and an RFI number for a new RFI weld VI request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and the RFI Number boxes, respectively.

2. In the Sub Contractor box, select the name of a sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

3. In the Inspection Date & Time box, select the date of inspection.

4. In the Location box, enter the location detail.

5. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection.

   Note: Before saving the added RFI weld VI request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added RFI weld VI request by using a box provided in the left side of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an RFI weld VI request”.

6. Click Save.

5.29.2 Add Joints for an RFI Weld VI Request

This page shows a list of joints for the corresponding weld map drawing. If you want to add joints for any added RFI weld VI request, do the following,

1. In the Weld Map Drawing box, select a weld map drawing number from a drop-down list.

   A list of joints including the piece mark numbers opens for the selected weld map drawing.

2. Click the check box of the respective joints.

3. Click   (Add Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page.

   

4. To update WPS number and unique number for the added joints, do one of the following steps,

   1. 1. If you want to update the WPS number for any joint, click the WPS Number column for the respective joint and then select the WPS number from a drop-down list.

         

      2.  Enter the unique number for the corresponding joint number in the respective Unique Number column.

          Note: If you want to update the same WPS number of first joint to other joints, click (Update WPS No button). The WPS number for the first joint will be updated for other joints.

5. If you want to update the WPS number, unique number, piece mark number details together, do the following,

   1. 1. Click  (TEMPLATE button) on the Added Joints box.

         An excel worksheet will be downloaded with a pre-defined template. The template contains a list of added joints.

         

      2. Enter the relevant details in the required columns on the excel worksheet.

      3. Once you have added the WPS, piece mark and other details in the excel worksheet, save the excel worksheet on your computer.

      4. Click (IMPORT button).

         A new window opens for importing the excel worksheet saved on your computer.

         

      5. Click   (Browse button) to select the excel worksheet to be uploaded.  

      6. Select the excel worksheet you want to upload from your computer.

      7. Click   (Upload button) to export the joint details that are included in the excel worksheet.  

         The details of the joints in the worksheet will be updated.

6. Click Save.

The RFI weld VI request is successfully added.

5.30 View RFI Weld VI (Unique Numbers)

The View RFI Weld VI tab helps you to view and edit the RFI weld VI request, which added by using the RFI Weld VI Request tab. This tab also allows you to add a new RFI weld VI request.

1. Click the View RFI Weld VI tab in the Inspection menu.

   The REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page opens with a list of added RFI weld VI requests.  

   

                                   Figure 5.30: REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page

5.30.1 Add an RFI Weld VI Request

If you want to add an RFI weld VI request, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page.

   A new page opens to add an RFI weld VI request. To know how to add an RFI weld VI request, see the topic, “Add an RFI weld VI request”.

Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, you must submit the added request for inspection.

5.30.2 Submit an RFI Weld VI Request

Once you have added the RFI weld VI request, the Request Status column in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.30.

1. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

5.30.3 Add a Representative for Any RFI Weld VI Request

If you want to add a representative for any added RFI weld VI request,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective RFI weld VI request.

   The Edit Form window opens.  

   

2. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative.

3. Click Save.

5.30.4 Add Result for an RFI Weld VI Request

If you want to add for the added RFI weld VI inspection request, do the following,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, for the respective RFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.30.

   A new window opens including the drawing number, joint number and WPS number for the respective RFI weld VI request.

   

2.  In the Result column, select the results from a drop-down list based on your inspection.

5.30.5 Print an RFI Weld VI Report

If you want to print an RFI weld VI report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page. See Fig 5.30.

5.30.6 Attach a File into an RFI Weld VI Request 

If you want to attach any file with any RFI weld VI request listed in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.30.7 Edit Any RFI Weld VI Request 

If you want to edit any existing RFI weld VI request in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.30.

   The page shows the added details of the RFI weld VI request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.30.8 Export RFI Weld VI Request List

You can export a list of RFI weld VI request added in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.30.9 Filter Any RFI Weld VI Request 

If you want to filter any RFI weld VI request from the list of RFI weld VI requests in the REQUEST FOR INSPECTION page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.31 View AFI Weld VI (Unique Numbers)

The View AFI Weld VI allows you to add a new AFI weld VI request. This tab also helps you to view and edit the added AFI weld VI request.

1. Click the View AFI Weld VI tab in the Inspection menu.

   The WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page opens.  

   

                                   Figure 5.31: WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page

5.31.1 Add an AFI Weld VI Request

If you want to add an AFI weld VI request, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page.

   The WELD VI - AFI Request page opens to add an AFI weld VI request.

   

    Tip: A report number and RFI number for a new AFI weld VI request will be updated automatically in the Report Number and RFI Number boxes.

2. In the Representative (AI) box, enter representative name for the application inspection and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively.

3. In the Representative (Client) box, enter representative name from the client and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively.

4. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

5. In the Representative (Contractor) box, enter representative name from the contractor and enter their email id and contact number in the Email and Contact No boxes, respectively.

6. In the Activity Code As Per ITP box, select the activity code as per ITP from a drop-down list.

7. In the Activity Code As Per Client box, select the activity code as per client from a drop-down list.

8. In the Examination Area box, enter the detail of examination area.

9. In the Viewing Condition box, enter the viewing condition detail.

10. In the Project Specification box, enter the project specification detail.

11. In the Instrument box, select an instrument from a drop-down list.

12. In the Surface Condition box, enter the surface condition detail.

13. In the Location box, enter the location detail.

14. In the Description/ Code Acceptance box, enter the description or the code acceptance detail for the inspection.
15. In the Inspection Item/ Technique Used box, enter the details of items to be inspected or used technique detail.

16. In the Subject Coverage/ Object box, enter the subject coverage or object detail.

17. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any.

    Note: Before saving the added AFI weld VI request, you must add the details of joints. You can add multiple joints for any added weld VI request by using a box provided in the left side of the page. To know how to add joints, see the topic “Add joints for an AFI fit up request”.

18. Click Save.

5.31.2 Add Joints for an AFI Weld VI Request

If you want to add joints for any added AFI weld VI request, do the following,

Once you enter the details to add an AFI weld VI request, a list of joints including the joint numbers, sheet numbers, and drawing numbers opens.

1. Click the check box of the respective joints.
2. Click  (Add Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are moved into the Added Joints box located in the right side of the page.

   

3. Click Save.

The selected joints are successfully added for the AFI weld VI request.

The AFI weld VI request is successfully added. Once you have added the AFI weld VI request, you must submit the added weld VI request for inspection.

5.31.3 Submit an AFI Weld VI Request

Once you have added the AFI weld VI request, the Request Status column in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons). See Fig 5.31.

1. If you want to submit the RFI weld VI request, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click 

     (Reject icon) to reject the request.

5.31.4 Change a Representative for Any AFI Weld VI Request

If you want to change a representative for any added AFI weld VI request,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Representative column for the respective AFI weld VI request.

   The Edit Form window opens.  

   

2. In the Representative box, enter the name of a representative.

3. Click Save.

5.31.5 Add Result for an AFI Weld VI Request

If you want to add result for the added AFI weld VI inspection request, do the following,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page, for the respective AFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.31.

   A new window opens including the drawing number and joint number for the respective AFI weld VI request.

   

2. In the Result column, select the results from a drop-down list based on your inspection.

3. Click Save.

5.31.6 Print an AFI Weld VI Report

If you want to print an AFI weld VI report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page. See Fig 5.31.

5.31.7 Attach a File into an AFI Weld VI Request 

If you want to attach any file with any AFI weld VI request listed in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.31.8 Edit Any AFI Weld VI Request  

If you want to edit any existing AFI weld VI request in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective AFI weld VI request. See Fig 5.31.

   The page shows the added details of the AFI weld VI request.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.31.9 Export AFI weld VI Request List

You can export a list of AFI weld VI request added in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.31.10 Filter Any AFI Weld VI Request 

If you want to filter any AFI weld VI request from the list of AFI weld VI requests in the WELD VI INSPECTION REQUEST page, you can use the   (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.32 Dust Level

Dust level test is performed to check the dust level. The Dust Level tab in the Inspection menu used to perform the dust level in the Structural project.

1. Click Dust Level in the Inspection menu.

   The Dust Level page opens.

   

                                                           Figure 5.32: Dust Level page

5.32.1 Add a Dust Level

If you want to add a dust level,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Dust Level See Fig 5.32.

   The page shows a new window to add the details of the dust level.

   

2. In the Painting System box, enter the painting system name.

3. In the Item No box, enter the item number.

4. In the Date of Testing box, select the dust level testing date.

5. In the Abrasives Used box, enter the detail of abrasives used in the dust level testing.

6. In the Equipment Used box, enter the detail of equipment used in the dust level testing.

7. In the Acceptable Level box, enter the acceptable level detail.

8. Click Save.

   The added dust level test will be listed in the Dust Level page.

5.32.2 Edit a Dust Level

If you want to edit any existing dust level in the Dust Level page,

1. Click (Edit icon) of the respective dust level. See Fig 5.32.

   The Dust Level page shows the details of the selected dust level.

2. Edit the details where you want.

3. Click Save.

5.32.3 Delete a Dust Level

If you want to delete any existing dust level in the Dust Level page, you can use (Delete icon) provided in the Dust Level page. To know how to delete, see the topic, “Delete Any Area”.

5.32.4 Attach a File into a Dust Level

If you want to attach any file with any dust level listed in the Dust Level page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

5.32.5 Print a Dust Level Report

If you want to print a dust level report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Dust Level page. See Fig 5.32.

5.32.6 Export Dust Level List

You can export a list of dust levels added in the Dust Level page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

5.32.7 Filter Any Dust Level

If you want to filter any specific dust level, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Dust Level page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.33 Blotter Test

Blotter test is used to check the cleanliness of the compressed air, where the compressed air free from any form of contaminants is necessary before its usage. The Blotter Test tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add the results of blotter test.

1. Click Blotter Test in the Inspection menu.

   The Blotter Test page opens.

   

                                                    Figure 5.33: Blotter Test page

5.33.1 Add a Blotter Test Report

If you want to add a blotter test report, do the following steps,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Blotter Test page.

   The page shows a new window to add the details of the blotter test report.

   

2. In the Location box, enter the location name.

3. In the Date of Testing box, select the date of blotter test.

4. In the Test Method box, enter the test method detail.

5. In the Acceptable Level box, enter the acceptable level detail.

6. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

7. Click Save.

The blotter test report will be added and listed in the Blotter Test page.  Once you have added the blotter test report, you must add the results of blotter test.

5.33.2 Add Results of Blotter Test

After completing the blotter test, you can add the blotter test result details. To add results, do the following steps,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective report.

   The Result window opens with the test readings.

   

2. In the Result column, select the result of each test reading from the given result options in the drop-down list.

3. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any.

4. Click Save.

5.33.3 Edit Any Blotter Test Report 

If you want to edit any existing blotter test report in the Blotter Test page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective blotter test report. See Fig 5.33.

   The Blotter Test page opens with the details of the selected blotter test report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.33.4 View a Blotter Test Report

If you want to view a blotter test report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Blotter Test page. See Fig 5.33.

5.33.5 Attach a File into a Blotter Test Report 

If you want to attach a file with any existing blotter test report listed in the Blotter Test page, you can attach the file by using (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

5.33.6 Export Blotter Test Report List

You can export a list of blotter test report list added in the Blotter Test page in both the pdf and excel formats by using  (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

5.33.7 Filter Any Blotter Test Report

If you want to filter any specific blotter test report in the Blotter Test page, you can use   (FILTER button) located on the Blotter Test page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.34 Fairing Report

The Fairing Report tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add the results of fairing test.

1. Click Fairing Report in the Inspection menu.

   The Fairing Report page opens.  

   

                                             Figure 5.34: Fairing Report page

5.34.1 Add a Fairing Report

If you want to add a fairing report, do the following steps,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Fairing Report page.

   The page shows a new window to add the details of the fairing report.

   

2.  In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the fairing report.

4. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the fairing report.

5. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the fairing report.

6. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the fairing report.

7. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the fairing report.

8. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the fairing report.

9. Click Save.

The fairing report will be added and listed in the Fairing Report page.  Once you have added the fairing report, you must add the results of fairing test.

5.34.2 Add Results of Fairing Test

After completing the fairing test, you can add the fairing test result details. To add results, do the following steps,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective report.

   The Fairing Request Details window opens.

   

2. Click  (ADD button) in the Fairing Request Details window.

   

3. In the Description box, enter the description for the fairing test.

4. In the Drawing No box, enter the drawing number.

5. In the Temperature box, enter the temperature value.

6. In the Deformation Status box, enter the deformation status detail.

7. In the Structural Thickness box, enter the structural thickness value.

8. In the Structural Thickness box, enter the structural thickness value.

9. In the Type of Material box, enter the type of material.

10. Click Save.

5.34.3 Edit Any Fairing Report 

If you want to edit any existing fairing report in the Fairing Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective fairing report. See Fig 5.34.

   The Fairing Report page opens with the details of the selected fairing report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.34.4 View a Fairing Report

If you want to view a fairing report, click (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Fairing Report page. See Fig 5.34.

5.34.5 Attach a File into a Fairing Report 

If you want to attach a file with any existing fairing report listed in the Fairing Report page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

5.34.6 Export Fairing Report List

You can export a list of fairing report list added in the Fairing Report page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and  (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

5.34.7 Filter Any Fairing Report

If you want to filter any specific fairing report in the Fairing Report page, you can use  (FILTER button) located on the Fairing Report page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.35 Chloride Test

The Chloride Test tab in the Inspection menu helps you to add the results of chloride test.

1. Click Chloride Test in the Inspection menu.

   The Chloride Test page opens.  

   

                                             Figure 5.35: Chloride Test page

5.35.1 Add a Chloride Test Report

If you want to add a chloride test report, do the following steps,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Chloride Test page.

   The page shows a new window to add the details of the chloride test report.

   

2. In the Surface Preparation box, enter the surface preparation detail.

3. In the Location box, enter the location detail.

4. In the Date of Testing box, select the date of chloride test.

5. In the Test Method box, enter the test method detail.

6. In the Acceptance Level box, enter the acceptance level detail.

7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

8. Click Save.

The chloride test report will be added and listed in the Chloride Test page.  Once you have added the chloride test report, you must add the results of chloride test.

5.35.2 Add Results of Chloride Test

After completing the chloride test, you can add the chloride test result details. To add results, do the following steps,

1. Click  (Add icon) in the Results column of the respective report.

   The Chloride Request Details window opens.

   

2. Click ADD button) in the Chloride Request Details window.

   

3. In the Test Reading box, enter the test reading detail.

4. In the Position box, enter the position detail.

5. In the Result box, select the result of the chloride test.

6. Click Save.

5.35.3 Edit Any Chloride Test Report 

If you want to edit any existing chloride test report in the Chloride Test page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective chloride test report. See Fig 5.35.

   The Chloride Test page opens with the details of the selected chloride test report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

5.35.4 View a Chloride Test Report

If you want to view a chloride test report, click  (print icon) provided in the Print column of the Chloride Test page. See Fig 5.34.

5.35.5 Attach a File into a Chloride Test Report 

If you want to attach a file with any existing chloride test report listed in the Chloride Test page, you can attach the file by using  (Attach icon) in the Attachment column. To know how to attach, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing”.

5.35.6 Export Chloride Test Report List

You can export a list of chloride test report list added in the Chloride Test page in both the pdf and excel formats by using (PDF button) and   (Excel button). To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list”.

5.35.7 Filter Any Chloride Test Report

If you want to filter any specific chloride test report in the Chloride Test page, you can use (FILTER button) located on the Chloride Test page. To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

5.36 Inspection Requisition Summary Report

The Inspection Requisition Summary tab in the Inspection menu used to view the inspection requisition summary report for a particular period.

1. Click Inspection Requisition Summary in the Inspection menu.

   The Requisition Inspection Summary page opens.

   

                                    Figure 5.36: Requisition Inspection Summary page

2. In the Start Date and End Date boxes, select the start and end dates.

3. Click Get Report.  

   The inspection requisition summary report for the selected period will be opened.

   

5.36.1 Print an Inspection Requisition Summary Report

If you want to print an inspection requisition summary report, use  and   (print icons) provided in the Requisition Inspection Summary page.

1. If you want to print the current page of the inspection requisition summary report, click  (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the inspection requisition summary report, click (print icon).

5.36.2 Export an Inspection Requisition Summary Report

You can export the inspection requisition summary report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the Requisition Inspection Summary page.

Structural

6.0 Structural

The Structural menu in the home page of the cuteQM app used to add result after performing structural related inspections. This menu also helps you to view structural reports, graphical reports, and other reports.

6.1 Radiographic Testing (RT) 

The RT method is one of the NDT inspection methods used for inspecting the materials in the structural project by using either x-rays or gamma rays.  Once the RT inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the RT inspection result details by using this Radiographic Testing (RT) tab. 

If you want to navigate Radiographic Testing (RT),

1. Click the Radiographic Testing (RT) tab in the Structural menu.

   The RT Report page opens.

   

                                                          Figure 6.1: RT Report page

6.1.1 Add an RT Report

If you want to add an RT report, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1.

   A new window opens to add an RT report.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    Tip: A report number for a new RT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list.  

3. In the Request Number box, select an RT request number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the RT report.

5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the RT report.

6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the RT report.

7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the RT report.

8. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the RT report.

9. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the RT report.

10. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date.

11. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

12. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job.

13. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job.

14.  Click Save.

The RT report is successfully added. Once you have added the RT report, you must add RT results for the respective added RT report.

6.1.2 Add RT Results 

If you want to add the RT results for the respective RT report, do the following,

1. Click the respective added RT report in the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1.

   The RT Results window opens.

   

                                                        Figure 6.1.1: RT Results page

2.  In the Image Quality Indicator (IQI) box, select IQI from a drop-down list.

3. In the Source & Size (MM) box, select the RT source and their size from a drop-down list.

4. In the Density box, enter the radiographic density range.

5. In the Code box, select the code of the material from a drop-down list.

6. In the Procedure Number box, select the procedure number from a drop-down list.

7. In the Sensitivity (%) box, set the radiographic sensitivity by using up and down arrows.

8. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the RT report.

9. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the RT report.

10. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date.

11. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

12. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job.

13. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job.

14.  Click Save.

The RT report is successfully added. Once you have added the RT report, you must add RT results for the respective added RT report.

6.1.2 Add RT Results 

If you want to add the RT results for the respective RT report, do the following,

1. Click the respective added RT report in the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1.

   The RT Results window opens.

   

                                                         Figure 6.1.1: RT Results page

2. In the Image Quality Indicator (IQI) box, select IQI from a drop-down list.

3. In the Source & Size (MM) box, select the RT source and their size from a drop-down list.

4. In the Density box, enter the radiographic density range.

5. In the Code box, select the code of the material from a drop-down list.

6. In the Procedure Number box, select the procedure number from a drop-down list.

7. In the Sensitivity (%) box, set the radiographic sensitivity by using up and down arrows.

8. In the Developing Time (Mins) box, set the developing time by using up and down arrows.

9. In the Film/ Type box, select the name of a film including type from a drop-down list.

10. In the Placement of IQI box, select any one option from source side and film side.

11. In the Source to Object Distance (SOD) box, enter the distance range between the source and the object.

12. In the Screens Type box, enter the type of screens.

13. In the Visible Wire/ Hole box, enter the relevant detail.

14. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list.

15. In the Source to Film Distance (SFD)box, enter the distance range between the source and the film.
16. In the Focus Film Distance (FFD) box, enter the focus film distance range.

17. In the Source box, select any one source option whether inside, outside, or other.

18. In the Technique box, select the radiographic technique from a drop-down list.

19. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options.

20. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list.

21. In the Surface Condition box, select the condition of the surface from the specified options.

22. In the Source Strength box, enter the source strength range.

23. In the Exposure Time (Mins) box, set the exposure time by using up and down arrows.

24. In the Note box, enter any note if you want.

25. Click Save RT Details.

The RT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the RT results, you must import joints added for the RT inspection.

6.1.3 Import Joints

If you want to import joints for the updated RT results,

1. Click (Import Joints button) in the RT Results See Fig 6.1.1.

   The Joints window opens with a list of joints.

   

2. Select the joints you want to import.

3. Click (Import Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are imported for the respective RT results. Once you have imported the joints, you must add the marker results.

6.1.4 Add Marker Results

If you want to add marker results for the respective RT results,

1. Click  (Add icon) for the respective RT results.

   The Marker Results window opens.

   

2. If you want to add any additional markers,

   1. 1. Set the number in the No. of Additional Markers box by using up and down arrows.

      2. Click (ADD button).

3.  If you want edit any existing marker results,   

   1. 1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective marker results.

         A new window opens to edit the marker results.

         

      2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and edit the marker results.

      3. Click Save.

4. If you want delete any existing marker results, click  (Delete icon) for the respective marker results.

6.1.5 Add Report Photos

If you want to add any report photos for the updated RT results,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the RT Results window. See Fig 6.1.1.

   

2. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

3. Click Upload.

The selected photo will be updated.

6.1.6 Attach a File into an RT Report

If you want to attach any file with any RT report listed in the RT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.1.7 Print an NDT – RT report

If you want to print an NDT - RT report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the RT Report page. See Fig 6.1.

6.1.8 Edit Any RT Report

 If you want to edit any existing RT report in the RT Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective RT report. See Fig 6.1.

   A new window opens to edit the RT report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.1.9 Export RT Report List

You can export a list of RT reports added in the RT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.1.10 Filter Any RT Report 

If you want to filter any RT report, do one of the following, 

1. If you want to filter any RT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the RT Report page, and then Click Search.

2. If you want to filter any RT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the RT Report page, and then Click Search.

3. If you want to filter any RT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the RT Report page, and then Click Search.

6.2 Ultrasonic Testing (UT) 

The UT method is one of the NDT inspection methods used for inspecting the materials in the structural project by using high frequency sound waves.  Once the UT inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the UT inspection result details by using this Ultrasonic Testing (UT) tab. If you want to navigate Ultrasonic Testing (UT),

1. Click the Ultrasonic Testing (UT) tab in the Structural menu.

   The UT Report page opens.

   

                                                                 Figure 6.2: UT Report page

6.2.1 Add an UT Report

If you want to add an UT report, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the UT Report page. See Fig 6.2.

   A new window opens to add an UT report.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new UT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2.  In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list.  

3. In the Request Number box, select an UT request number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the UT report.

5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the UT report.

6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the UT report.

7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the UT report.

8. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the UT report.

9. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the UT report.

10. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date.

11. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

12. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job.

13. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job.

14.  Click Save.

The UT report is successfully added. Once you have added the UT report, you must add UT results for the respective added UT report.

6.2.2 Add UT Results 

If you want to add the UT results for the respective UT report, do the following,

1. Click the respective added UT report in the UT Report page. See Fig 6.2.

   The UT Results window opens.

   

   

   

                                                    Figure 6.2.1: UT Results page

2.  In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list.

3. In the Description box, enter the description about the UT inspection.

4. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list.

5. In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list.

6. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list.

7. In the Couplant box, select the couplant material from a drop-down list.

8. In the Test Procedure Number box, select the test procedure number from a drop-down list.

9. In the Simulation Blocks box, enter the detail of simulation blocks.

10. In the Ref. Hole Diameter box, enter the diameter value of the reference hole.

11. In the Sensitivity Setting box, enter the information about the sensitivity setting.

12. In the Sides Scanned box, enter the details of the sides that are scanned.

13. In the Special Equipment box, enter the name of the special equipment if any.

14. In the Computerized Program Name box, enter the computerized program name.

15. In the Surface Scanned box, the details of the surfaces that are scanned.

16. In the Flaw Detector box, select a flaw detector from a drop-down list.

17. In the Scan Limitation box, enter the limitation range of scanning.

18. In the Bevel Type box, enter the type of the bevel.

19. In the Specification box, select the specification from a drop-down list.

20. In the Calibration Block box, select the calibration block from a drop-down list.

21. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

22. In the Technique box, select the technique from a drop-down list.

23. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options.

24. In the Surface Condition box, select the surface condition from the specified options.

25. Click Save UT Details.

The UT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the UT results, you must add the probe and cable details for the UT inspection.

6.2.3 Add Probe and Cable details 

If you want to add probe and cable details for the updated UT results,

1. Click  (Add Probe/ Cable button) in the Probe& Cable Details window. See Fig 6.2.1.

   A new window opens to add the probe and cable details.

   

2.  In the Probe box, select a probe from a drop-down list.

3. In the Cable box, select a cable from a drop-down list.

4. In the Ref. dB box, enter the reference decibel range.

5. In the Surf Comp dB box, enter the decibel range of the surface component.

6. In the Test Range (MM) box, enter the test range in millimeters.

7. In the Reference Level box, enter the reference level detail.

8. In the Scanning dB box, enter the scanning decibel range.

9. In the TR Loss box, enter the transmission loss detail.

10. Click Save.

The probe and cable details are successfully added. Once you have added the probe and cable details, you must add the reference setting details.

6.2.4 Add Reference Setting details 

If you want to add the reference setting details for the updated UT results,

1. Click   (Add Reference Setting button) in the Reference Setting Details See Fig 6.2.1.

   A new window opens to add the reference setting details.

   

2. In the Reference Block box, select the reference block from a drop-down list.

3. In the Probe Sr. No box, select the serial number of the probe from a drop-down list.

4. In the Reference box, enter the reference detail.

5. In the Eqpt Gain (dB) box, enter the equipment gain in decibels.

6. In the Damping box, enter the damping ratio.

7. In the Rejection box, enter the rejection detail.

8. In the Amplitude Height box, enter the amplitude height range.

9. In the Skip box, enter the skip detail.

10. In the Beam Path box, enter the beam path detail.

11. In the Range box, enter the range detail.

12. Click Save.

The reference setting details are successfully added. Once you have added the reference setting details, you must import joints for the updated UT results.

6.2.5 Import Joints for UT

If you want to import joints for the updated UT results,

1. Click  (Import Joints button) in the UT Results See Fig 6.2.1.

   The Joints window opens with a list of joints.

   

2.  Select the joints you want to import.

3. Click (Import Selected Joints button).

The selected joints are imported for the respective UT results. Once you have imported the joints, you must add the UT detail results.

6.2.6 Add UT Results

If you want to add UT detail results for the respective UT results,

1. Click (Add icon) for the respective UT results.

   The UT Detail Results window opens.

   

2. Click (ADD button) in the UT Detail Results window.

   A new window opens in the Probes column.

   

3. Select the probe from a drop-down list.

4. Enter other details in the respective columns.

5. Click Save.

6.2.7 Add Report Photos

If you want to add any report photos for the updated UT results,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the UT Results See Fig 6.2.1.

   

2. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

3.  Click Upload.

The selected photo will be updated.

6.2.8 Attach a File into an UT Report

If you want to attach any file with any UT report listed in the UT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.2.9 Print an NDT – UT Report

If you want to print an NDT - UT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the UT Report page. See Fig 6.2.

6.2.10 Edit Any UT report

 If you want to edit any existing UT report in the UT Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective UT report. See Fig 6.2.

   A new window opens to edit the UT report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.2.11 Export UT Report List

You can export a list of UT reports added in the UT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.2.12 Filter Any UT Report 

If you want to filter any UT report, do one of the following,

1. If you want to filter any UT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the UT Report page, and then Click Search.
2. If you want to filter any UT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the UT Report page, and then Click Search.

If you want to filter any UT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the UT Report page, and then Click Search.

6.3 Dye Penetrant Testing (DPT)

The DPT method is one of the oldest and simplest NDT inspection methods used for inspecting the materials in the structural project by using ultraviolet or white light, depending on the type of dye used - fluorescent or non fluorescent (visible). PT also called liquid penetrate inspection (LPI) or penetrant testing (PT).

Once the UT inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the UT inspection result details by using this Dye Penetrant Testing (DPT) tab. If you want to navigate Dye Penetrant Testing (DPT),

1. Click the Dye Penetrant Testing (DPT) tab in the Structural menu.

   The PT Report page opens.

   

                                                     Figure 6.3: PT Report page

6.3.1 Add a DPT Report

If you want to add a DPT report, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the PT Report page. See Fig 6.3.

   A new window opens to add an PT report.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new PT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

    

2. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list.

3. In the Request Number box, select an PT request number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PT report.

5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PT report.

6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PT report.

7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PT report.

8. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the PT report.

9. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PT report.

10. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date.

11. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

12. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job.

13. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job.

14.  Click Save.

The PT report is successfully added. Once you have added the PT report, you must add PT results for the respective added PT report.

6.3.2 Add DPT Results 

If you want to add the DPT results for the respective PT report, do the following,

1. Click the respective added PT report in the PT Report page. See Fig 6.3.

   The DPT Results window opens.

   

   

                                                Figure 6.3.1: DPT Results page

2.  In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail.

3. In the Description box, enter the description.

4. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list.

5. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list.

6. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list.

7. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface.

8. In the Dwell Time box, enter dwell time range.  

9. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value.

10. In the Cleaner box, select the cleaner from a drop-down list.

11. In the Penetrant box, select the penetrant from a drop-down list.

12. In the Developer box, select the developer from a drop-down list.

13. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification.

14. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value.

15. In the Development Time box, enter the time for development.

16. In the Welding Process box, enter the type of welding process.

17. In the Code box, enter the code detail.

18. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options.

19. In the Item Tested box, select the tested items from the specified options.

20. In the Inspection Method box, select the inspection method from the specified options.

21. In the Material box, select the material from a drop-down list.

22. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

23. Click Save DPT Details.

The DPT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the DPT results, you must import joints added for the DPT inspection results.

6.3.3 Import Joints for DPT

If you want to import joints for the updated DPT results,

1. Click    (Import Joints button) in the DPT Results window. See Fig 6.3.1.

   The Joints window opens with a list of joints.

   

2. Select the joints you want to import.

3. Click (Import Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are imported for the respective DPT results.

6.3.4 Add Report Photos

If you want to add any report photos for the updated DPT results,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the DPT Results window. See Fig 6.3.1.

   

    

    

2. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

3. Click Upload.

   The selected photo will be updated.

6.3.5 Attach a File into a DPT Report

If you want to attach any file with any DPT report listed in the PT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 

6.3.6 Print an NDT – DPT report

If you want to print an NDT - PT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the PT Report page. See Fig 6.3.

6.3.7 Edit Any DPT report

 If you want to edit any existing DPT report in the RT Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective DPT report. See Fig 6.3.

   A new window opens to edit the DPT report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.3.8 Export DPT Report List

You can export a list of DPT reports added in the PT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.3.9 Filter Any DPT Report 

If you want to filter any DPT report, do one of the following,

1. If you want to filter any DPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PT Report page, and then Click Search.

2. If you want to filter any DPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PT Report page, and then Click Search.

If you want to filter any DPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PT Report page, and then Click Search.

6.4 PT After Load Test

The PT After Load Test tab in the Structural menu helps you to add PT results while performing the PT inspection after completing the load test.

Once the PT after load test inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the PT result details by using this PT After Load Test tab. If you want to navigate PT After Load Test,

1. Click the PT After Load Test tab in the Structural menu. The PT After Load Test Report page opens.

   

                                          Figure 6.4: PT After Load Test Report page

6.4.1 Add a PT after load test report

If you want to add a PT after load test report, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the PT After Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.4.

   A new window opens to add a PT after load test report.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    

   Tip: A report number for a new PT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

    

2. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list.  

3. In the Request Number box, select an PT request number after load test from a drop-down list.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PT report after load test.

5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PT report after load test.
6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PT report after load test.
7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PT report after load test.
8. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the PT report after load test.
9. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PT report after load test.

10. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date.

11. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

12. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job.

13. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job.

14.  Click Save.

The PT report after load test is successfully added. Once you have added the PT report, you must add PT results for the respective PT report.

6.4.2 Add PT Results 

If you want to add the PT results for the respective PT report after load test, do the following,

1. Click the respective added PT report in the PT After Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.4.

   The PT After Load Test Results page opens.

   

                                        Figure 6.4.1: PT After Load Test Results page

    

2. In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail.

3. In the Description box, enter the description.

4. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list.

5. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list.

6. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list.

7. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface.

8. In the Dwell Time box, enter dwell time range.  

9. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value.

10. In the Cleaner box, select the cleaner from a drop-down list.

11. In the Penetrant box, select the penetrant from a drop-down list.

12. In the Developer box, select the developer from a drop-down list.

13. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification.

14. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value.

15. In the Development Time box, enter the time for development.

16. In the Welding Process box, enter the type of welding process.

17. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options.

18. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

19. Click Save PTLT Details.

The PT after load test results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the PT results, you must import joints added for the PT after load test inspection results.

6.4.3 Import Joints for PT After Load Test

If you want to import joints for the updated PT after load test results,

1. Click (Import Joints button) in the PT After Load Test Results window. See Fig 6.4.1.

   The Joints window opens with a list of joints.

   

2. Select the joints you want to import.

3. Click  (Import Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are imported for the respective DPT results.

6.4.4 Add Report Photos

If you want to add any report photos for the updated PT after load test results,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the PT After Load Test Results See Fig 6.4.1.

   

2. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

3. Click Upload.

   The selected photo will be updated.

6.4.5 Attach a file into a PT After Load Test Report

If you want to attach any file with any PT report listed in the PT After Load Test Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.4.6 Print an NDT – PT After Load Test Report

If you want to print an NDT – PT after load test report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the PT After Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.4.

6.4.7 Edit Any PT After Load Test Report

 If you want to edit any existing PT report in the PT After Load Test Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective PT report. See Fig 6.4.

   A new window opens to edit the PT report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.4.8 Export PT after load test report list

You can export a list of PT reports added in the PT After Load Test Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.4.9 Filter Any PT After Load Test Report 

If you want to filter any PT report, do one of the following,

1. If you want to filter any PT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PT After Load Test Report page, and then Click Search.

2. If you want to filter any PT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the PT After Load Test Report page, and then Click Search.

If you want to filter any PT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the PT After Load Test Report page, and then Click Search.

6.5 Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT)

MPT also referred to as Magnetic Particle Inspection is one of the NDT inspection methods used to detect defects or discontinuities such as cracks, at or near the surface in ferromagnetic metals such as iron, steel, nickel, cobalt and so on.

Once the MPT inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the MPT inspection result details by using this Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT) tab. If you want to navigate Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT),

1. Click the Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT) tab in the Structural menu.

   The MT Report page opens.

   

                                                    Figure 6.5: MT Report page

6.5.1 Add an MPT Report

If you want to add an MPT report, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the MT Report page. See Fig 6.5.

   A new window opens to add an MPT report.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new MPT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list.  

3. In the Request Number box, select an MPT request number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the MPT report.

5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the MPT report.

6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the MPT report.

7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the MPT report.

8. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the MPT report.

9. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the MPT report.

10. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date.

11. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

12. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job.

13. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job.

14.  Click Save.

The MPT report is successfully added. Once you have added the MPT report, you must add MPT results for the respective MPT report.

6.5.2 Add MPT Results 

If you want to add the MPT results for the respective MPT report, do the following,

1. Click the respective MPT report in the MT Report page. See Fig 6.5.

   The MPT Results window opens.

   

   

   

                                                  Figure 6.5.1: MPT Results page

2.  In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list.

3. In the Description box, enter the description.

4. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list.

5. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list.

6. In the Black Magnetic Ink box, select the type of black magnetic ink from a drop-down list.

7. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface.

8. In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail.

9. In the White Contrast Paint box, select the type of white contrast paint.

10. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification.

11. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value.

12. In the Type of Current box, enter the type of current.

13. In the Lifting Capacity box, select the lifting capacity value.

14. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list.

15. In the Yoke/ Prod Space box, enter the relevant information.

16. In the Particles Type box, select the type of particles from a drop-down list.

17. In the Particles Make & model box, enter the model of the particle including made of materials.

18. In the Background Contrast & Type box, enter the type of background including contrast range.

19. In the Demagnetization box, if you want demagnetization select Yes otherwise select No.

20. In the Magnetizing Technique box, enter the magnetizing technique.

21. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value.

22. In the Calibration Sensitivity box, enter the calibration sensitivity range.

23. In the Method of Inspection box, enter the inspection method.

24. In the Code box, enter the code detail.

25. In the Color box, select any color from the specified options.

26. In the Suspension box, select any suspension liquid from the specified options.

27. In the Lighting box, select any lighting from the specified options.

28. In the Method box, select any method from the specified options.

29. In the Item Tested box, select the tested items from the specified options.

30. In the Examination Stage box, select the examination stage from the specified options.

31. Click Save MPT Details.

The MPT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the MPT results, you must import joints added for the MPT inspection results.

6.5.3 Import Joints for MPT 

If you want to import joints for the updated MPT results,

1. Click (Import Joints button) in the MPT Results See Fig 6.5.1.

   The Joints window opens with a list of joints.

   

2. Select the joints you want to import.

3. Click (Import Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are imported for the respective MPT results.

6.5.4 Add Report Photos

If you want to add any report photos for the updated MPT results,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the MPT Results window. See Fig 6.5.1.

   

2. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

3. Click Upload.

The selected photo will be updated.

6.5.5 Attach a File into an MPT Report

If you want to attach any file with any MPT report listed in the MT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.5.6 Print an NDT – MPT Report

If you want to print an NDT - MPT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the MT Report page. See Fig 6.5.

6.5.7 Edit Any MPT Report

 If you want to edit any existing MPT report in the MT Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MPT report. See Fig 6.5.

   A new window opens to edit the MPT report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.5.8 Export MPT Report List

You can export a list of MPT reports added in the MT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.5.9 Filter Any MPT Report 

If you want to filter any MPT report, do one of the following,

1. If you want to filter any MPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the MT Report page, and then Click Search.
2. If you want to filter any MPT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the MT Report page, and then Click Search.

If you want to filter any MPT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the MT Report page, and then Click Search.

6.6 MPI After Load Test (MPI)

The MPI After Load Test (MPI) tab in the Structural menu helps you to add MPI results while performing the MPI inspection after completing the load test.

Once the MPI after load test inspection request added in the NDT Inspection Request tab, you can add the MPI result details by using this MPI After Load Test (MPI) tab. If you want to navigate MPI After Load Test (MPI),

1. Click the MPI After Load Test (MPI) tab in the Structural menu.

   The MPI Report page opens.

   

                                                   Figure 6.6: MPI Report page

3.6.1 Add an MPI After Load Test Report

If you want to add an MPI after load test report, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the MPI Report page. See Fig 6.6.

   A new window opens to add an MPI after load test report.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    Tip: A report number for a new MPI report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list.  

3. In the Request Number box, select an MPI request number after load test from a drop-down list.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the MPI report after load test.
5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the MPI report after load test.
6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the MPI report after load test.
7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the MPI report after load test.
8. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the MPI report after load test.
9. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the MPI report after load test.

10. In the Rep. Accept Date box, select the report accept date.

11. In the Inspection Date box, select the date of inspection.

12. In the Job Done Report Number box, enter the report number of completed inspection job.

13. In the Job Completed Date box, select the completed date of the inspection job.

14.  Click Save.

The MPI report after load test is successfully added. Once you have added the MPI report, you must add MPI results for the respective MPI report.

6.6.2 Add MPI Results 

If you want to add the MPI results for the respective MPI report after load test, do the following,

1. Click the respective MPI report in the MPI Report page. See Fig 6.6.

   The MPI Results page opens.

   

   

                                                       Figure 6.6.1: MPI Results page

    

2. In the Test Equipment box, select the test equipment from a drop-down list.

3. In the Description box, enter the description.

4. In the Test Procedure box, select the test procedure from a drop-down list.

5. In the Test Method box, select the test method from a drop-down list.

6. In the Black Magnetic Ink box, select the type of black magnetic ink from a drop-down list.

7. In the Surface Condition box, enter the condition of the surface.

8. In the Light Source box, enter the light source detail.

9. In the White Contrast Paint box, select the type of white contrast paint.

10. In the Material Specification box, enter the material specification.

11. In the Material Thickness box, enter the material thickness value.

12. In the Type of Current box, enter the type of current.

13. In the Lifting Capacity box, select the lifting capacity value.

14. In the Acceptance Criteria box, select the acceptance criteria from a drop-down list.

15. In the Yoke/ Prod Space box, enter the relevant information.

16. In the Particles Type box, select the type of particles from a drop-down list.

17. In the Particles Make & model box, enter the model of the particle including made of materials.

18. In the Background Contrast & Type box, enter the type of background including contrast range.

19. In the Demagnetization box, if you want demagnetization select Yes otherwise select No.

20. In the Magnetizing Technique box, enter the magnetizing technique.

21. In the Surface Temperature box, enter the surface temperature value.

22. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

23. Click Save MPI Details.

The MPI results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the MPI results, you must import joints added for the MPI inspection results.

6.6.3 Import Joints for MPI

If you want to import joints for the updated MPI results,

1. Click (Import Joints button) in the MPI Results See Fig 6.6.1.

   The Joints window opens with a list of joints.

   

2. Select the joints you want to import.

3. Click (Import Selected Joints button).

   The selected joints are imported for the respective MPI results.

6.6.4 Add Report Photos

If you want to add any report photos for the updated MPI results,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the MPI Results See Fig 6.6.1.

   

2. Click   (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

3. Click Upload.

   The selected photo will be updated.

6.6.5 Attach a File into an MPI Report

If you want to attach any file with any MPI report listed in the MPI Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.6.6 Print an NDT – MPI Report

If you want to print an NDT - MPI report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the MPI Report page. See Fig 6.6.

6.6.7 Edit Any MPI Report

 If you want to edit any existing MPI report in the MPI Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective MPI report. See Fig 6.6.

   A new window opens to edit the MPI report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.6.8 Export MPI Report List

You can export a list of MPI reports added in the MPI Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.6.9 Filter any MPI report 

If you want to filter any MPI report, do one of the following,

1. If you want to filter any MPI report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the MPI Report page, and then Click Search.
2. If you want to filter any MPI report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the MPI Report page, and then Click Search.
3. If you want to filter any MPI report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the MPI Report page, and then Click Search.

6.7 PWHT

The PWHT tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a PWHT report after completing the PWHT inspection process. If you want to add a PWHT report, do the following,

Once the RFI request for PWHT added using the RFI Request for PWHT tab, you can add the PWHT result details by using this PWHT tab. If you want to navigate PWHT,

1. Click the PWHT tab in the Structural menu.

   The PWHT Report page opens.

   

                                                         Figure 6.7: PWHT Report page

9.7.1 Add a PWHT Report

If you want to add a PWHT report, do the following,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the PWHT Report page. See Fig 6.7.

   A new window opens to add a PWHT report.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new PWHT report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the NDT By box, select the creation of NDT whether by third party or internal from a drop-down list.

3. In the Request Number box, select an RFI request for PWHT number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the PWHT report.

5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the PWHT report.

6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the PWHT report.

7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the PWHT report.

8. In the Accepted/ Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the PWHT report.

9. In the Accepted/ Approved Date box, select the approved date of the PWHT report.

10.  Click Save.

The PWHT report is successfully added. Once you have added the PWHT report, you must add PWHT result details for the respective PWHT report.

6.7.2 Add PWHT Results 

If you want to add the PWHT results for the respective PWHT report, do the following,

1. Click the respective PWHT report in the PWHT Report page. See Fig 6.7.

   The PWHT Results page opens.

   

                                                      Figure 6.7.1: PWHT Results page

2.  In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date.

3. In the Material Specification box, enter the specification for the material.

4. In the Speed box, enter the speed range.

5. In the HT Procedure No box, select the HT procedure number.

6. In the Heating Rate box, enter the heating rate value.  

7. In the Holding (Temperature) box, enter the holding temperature.

8. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time value.

9. In the Cooling Rate box, enter the cooling rate value.

10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

11. Click Save PWHT Details.

The PWHT results are successfully updated. Once you have updated the PWHT results, you can edit the joints added for the PWHT inspection results in the Joint Results window.

6.7.3 Add Report Photos

If you want to add any report photos for the updated PWHT results,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box in the PWHT Results See Fig 6.7.1.

   

2. Click   (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

3. Click Upload.

The selected photo will be updated.

6.7.4 Attach a File into a PWHT Report

If you want to attach any file with any PWHT report listed in the PWHT Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.7.5 Print a PWHT Report

If you want to print a PWHT report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the PWHT Report page. See Fig 6.7.

6.7.6 Edit Any PWHT Report

 If you want to edit any existing PWHT report in the PWHT Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective PWHT report. See Fig 6.7.

   A new window opens to edit the PWHT report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.7.7 Export PWHT Report List

You can export a list of PWHT reports added in the PWHT Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.7.8 Filter Any PWHT Report 

If you want to filter any PWHT report, use (FILTER button) in the PWHT Report page, See Fig 6.7 or do one of the following,

1. If you want to filter any PWHT report based on the report number, enter the corresponding report number in the Report No box in the PWHT Report page, and then Click Search.
2. If you want to filter any PWHT report based on the request number, enter the corresponding request number in the Request No box in the PWHT Report page, and then Click Search.

3. If you want to filter any PWHT report based on the drawing number, enter the corresponding drawing number in the Drawing No box in the PWHT Report page, and then Click Search.

6.8 Hydrostatic Report

Hydrostatic testing is a type of pressure test where the materials are tested for strength and leaks. The Hydrostatic Report tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a hydrostatic pressure test report after completing the hydrostatic testing in the structural project.

If you want to add a hydrostatic pressure test report, do the following,

1. Click the Hydrostatic Report Tab.

   The Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page opens.

   

                                         Figure 6.8: Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page

6.8.1 Add a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report

If you want to add a hydrostatic pressure test report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page. See Fig 6.8.

   A new window opens to add a hydrostatic pressure test report.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new hydrostatic pressure test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Drawing box, select the drawing from a drop-down list.

3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the hydrostatic pressure test report.

4. In the Prepared Date box, select the preparation date of the report.

5. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the hydrostatic pressure test report.

6. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the report.

7. In the Approved By box, enter the name of a person who has approved the hydrostatic pressure test report.

8. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the report.

9. Click Save.

The hydrostatic pressure test report is successfully added. Once you have added the hydrostatic pressure test report, you must add the pressure test result details for the added report.

6.8.2 Add Pressure Test Results for an Added Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report

If you want to add the details of pressure test results for the added hydrostatic pressure test report, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report  See Fig 6.8.

   Multiple windows open.

   

                                              Figure 6.8.1: Pressure test results page

2. If you want to add test parameters, do the following steps,

   1. 1. Navigate to the Test Parameters window. See Fig 6.8.1.

      2. In the Test Pressure box, enter the test pressure value.

      3. In the Test Temperature box, enter the test temperature value.

      4. In the Item/Part box, select any item/part from a drop-down list.

      5. In the Test Medium box, enter the test medium information.

      6. In the Holding Period box, enter the holding period value.

      7. In the Design Pressure box, enter the design pressure value.

      8. In the Test Date box, select the test date.

      9. In the Position box, enter the position detail.

      10. In the Operating Pressure box, enter the operating pressure value.

      11. In the Hydrostatic Test (HT) Procedure No box, enter the hydrostatic test procedure number.

      12. In the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) box, enter the maximum allowable working pressure value.

      13. In the Design Temperature box, enter the design temperature value.
      14. In the Maximum Allowable Pressure (MAP)box, enter the maximum allowable pressure value.
      15. In the Results/ Remarks box, select the result from a drop-down list.

      16. In the Chloride box, enter the chloride value.

      17. In the Actual Test Pressure box, enter the actual test pressure value.

      18. In the Test Location box, enter the test location detail.

      19. In the Test Observation box, enter the test observation detail.

      20. In the Test Code box, select the test code from the specified options.  

      21. Click Save.

          The test parameters are successfully added.

           
3. If you want to add equipment details, do the following steps,

   1. 1. Navigate to the Equipment Details window. See Fig 6.8.1.

      2. In the Conducted By box, select any one option whether internal or external from a drop-down list.

      3. In the Position box, select the position from a drop-down list.

      4. In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment from a drop-down list.

      5. Click Save.

         The equipment details are successfully added.

4. If you want to add test record, do the following,

   1. 1. Navigate to the Test Records window. See Fig 6.8.1.

      2. In the Time box, enter the time duration of testing.

      3. In the PG- Bottom box, enter the pressure value in the bottom of the bars.

      4. In the PG- Top box, enter the pressure value in the top of the bars.

      5. In the Water box, enter the temperature of the water.

      6. In the Air box, enter the temperature of the air.

      7. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

      8. Click Save.

         The test records are added successfully.

5. If you want to add report photos, do the following,

   1. 1. Navigate to the Report Photos window. See Fig 6.8.1.

      2. Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos window.

         

      3. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

      4. Click Upload.

         The selected photo will be updated.

6.8.3 Print a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report

If you want to print a hydrostatic pressure test report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page. See Fig 6.8.

6.8.4 Print a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report with Certificates

If you want to print a hydrostatic pressure test report with certificates, click (print icon) provided in the Report with Certificates column of the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page. See Fig 6.8.

6.8.5 Attach a File into a Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report

If you want to attach any file with any hydrostatic pressure test report listed in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 

6.8.6 Edit Any Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report

If you want to edit any existing hydrostatic pressure test report in the Hydrostatic Pressure Test Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective hydrostatic pressure test report. See Fig 6.8.

   A new window opens to edit the hydrostatic pressure test report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.9 Vacuum Test

Vacuum test performed to check for the existence of any leak in the materials utilized in the Structural project.  The Vacuum Test tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a vacuum test report once the vacuum test has completed.

If you want to add a vacuum test report, do the following,

1. Click the Vacuum Test Tab.

   The Vacuum Test page opens.

   

                                                      Figure 6.9: Vacuum Test page

6.9.1 Add a Vacuum Test Report

If you want to add a vacuum test report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Vacuum Test Report page. See Fig 6.9.

   A new window opens to add a vacuum test report.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    Tip: A report number for a new vacuum test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

    

2. In the Description box, enter the description for the vacuum test.

3. In the Sub-System box, select the sub-system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date.

5. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number.

6. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation detail.

7. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal detail.

8. In the Location box, enter the location where the vacuum test is performed.

9. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list.

10. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

11. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

12. Click Save.

The vacuum test report is successfully added.

6.9.2 Submit and Approve a Vacuum Test Report

Once you have added the vacuum test report, the Submission column in the Vacuum Test page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the vacuum test report, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the vacuum test report, the Request Status column in the Vacuum Test page is appeared with (Accept and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the vacuum test report, click  (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

6.9.3 Print a Vacuum Test Report

If you want to print a vacuum test report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Vacuum Test Report page. See Fig 6.9.

6.9.4 Attach a File into a Vacuum Test Report

If you want to attach any file with any vacuum test report listed in the Vacuum Test page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section. 

6.9.5 Edit Any Vacuum Test Report

If you want to edit any existing vacuum test report in the Vacuum Test page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective vacuum test report. See Fig 6.9.

   A new window opens to edit the vacuum test report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.9.6 Export Vacuum Test Report List

You can export a list of vacuum test reports added in the Vacuum Test page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.9.7 Filter Any Vacuum Test Report

If you want to filter any vacuum test report from the list of in the Vacuum Test page, you can use the   (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

6.10 Back-Gouging

Back-gouging is a removing process performed to remove weld metal and base metal from the weld root side by grinding, gas cutting or by using gouging electrode.

The Back-Gouging tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a back-gouging report once the back-gouging process has completed. If you want to add a back-gouging report, do the following,

1. Click the Back-Gouging Tab.

   The Back-Gouging page opens.

   

                                                  Figure 6.10: Back-Gouging page

6.10.1 Add a Back-Gouging Report

If you want to add a back-gouging report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Back-Gouging page. See Fig 6.10.

   A new window opens to add a back-gouging report.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    Tip: A report number for a new back-gouging report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

    

2. In the Description box, enter the description for the back-gouging.

3. In the Sub-System box, select the sub-system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date.

5. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number.

6. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation detail.

7. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal detail.

8. In the Location box, enter the location where the back-gouging is performed.

9. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list.

10. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

11. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

12. Click Save.

The back-gouging report is successfully added.

6.10.2  Add Back-Gouging Report Photos

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Back-Gouging page. See Fig 6.10.

   The Report Photos box opens.  

   

2. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Parameters box.

   

3. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

4. Click Upload.

The selected photo will be updated.

6.10.3 Submit and Approve a Back-Gouging Report

Once you have added the back-gouging report, the Submission column in the Back-Gouging page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the back-gouging report, click (Submit icon) in the Submission column. Otherwise click 

   (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the back-gouging report, the Request Status column in the Back-Gouging page is appeared with  (Accept and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the back-gouging report, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

6.10.4 Print a Back-Gouging Report

If you want to print a back-gouging report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Back-Gouging page. See Fig 6.10.

6.10.5 View the Back-Gouging Signature Details 

If you want to view the signature details of the persons who has completed the back-gouging, click (Sign icon) provided in the Sign Details column of the Back-Gouging page. See Fig 6.10.

6.10.6 Attach a File into a Back-Gouging Report

If you want to attach any file with any back-gouging report listed in the Back-Gouging page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.10.7 Edit Any Back-Gouging Report

If you want to edit any existing back-gouging report in the Back-Gouging page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective back-gouging report. See Fig 6.10.

   A new window opens to edit the back-gouging report.

   

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.10.8 Export Back-Gouging Report List

You can export a list of back-gouging reports added in the Back-Gouging page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.10.9 Filter Any Back-Gouging Report

If you want to filter any back-gouging report from the list of in the Back-Gouging page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

6.11 Final Visual 

Visual testing is one of methods of NDT of optical type. Final visual testing is usually performed with the naked eye or with magnifying glasses (magnifiers) with magnification up to 7x.

The Final Visual tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a final visual test report after completing the final visual test. If you want to add a final visual test report, do the following,

1. Click the Final Visual Tab.

   The Final Visual Test page opens.

   

                                                         Figure 6.11: Final Visual Test page

6.11.1 Add a Final Visual Test Report

If you want to add a final visual test report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Final Visual Test page. See Fig 6.11.

   A new window opens to add a final visual test report.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    

2. In the Report Number box, enter the report number for the final visual test.

3. In the Description box, enter the description for the final visual test.

4. In the System box, select the system from a drop-down list.

5. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date.

6. In the Frame No box, enter the frame number.

7. In the Elevation box, enter the elevation detail.

8. In the Longitudinal box, enter the longitudinal detail.

9. In the Location box, enter the location where the final visual test is performed.

10. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list.

11. In the Assessment Checklist box, enter the assessment checklist detail.

12. In the Checklist No box, select the check list number from a drop-down list.

13. In the Discipline box, enter the discipline detail.

14. In the Site box, enter the site detail.

15. In the Contractor box, enter the name of a contractor.

16. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor from a drop-down list.

17. In the Module No box, enter the module number.

18. In the Area/ Component box, enter the area/ component detail.

19. In the Stage of Completion box, select the stage of completion of visual test from the given options.

20. In the Document Type box, enter the type of document.

21. In the Class box, enter the class detail.

22. In the Status box, enter the status of the visual test.

23. In the Rev. Date box, enter the revision date of the visual test.

24. In the Contractor Document Number box, enter the document number of the contractor.

25. In the Equipment box, enter the equipment name.

26. In the Inspector/ Representative box, enter the name of inspector/ representative.

27. In the Detail Description/Tagging box, enter the detail description.

28. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

29. Click Save.

    The final visual test report is successfully added.

6.11.2 View Checklist Details

If you want to view the check list details, do the following,

1. Click (Add icon) in the Edit column for the respective final visual test report in the Final Visual Test See Fig 6.11.

   The Check List Details window opens. 

   

   The Check List Details window shows a list of added check lists using the Check List tab. This window also shows the results of check list whether accepted or not.

6.11.3 Submit and Approve a Final Visual Test Report

Once you have added the visual test report, the Request Status column in the Final Visual Test page is appeared with(Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the visual test report, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click 

   (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the visual test report, the Completed Status column in the Final Visual Test page is appeared with (Accept and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the visual test report, click (Submit icon) in the Completed Status Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

6.11.4 Print a Final Visual Checklist Report

If you want to print a final visual checklist report, click(print icon) provided in the Checklist Report column of the Final Visual Test page. See Fig 6.11.

6.11.5 Print a General Visual Checklist Report

If you want to print a general visual checklist report, click (print icon) provided in the General Report column of the Final Visual Test page. See Fig 6.11.

6.11.6 Print a Final Visual Test Report

If you want to print a final visual test report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Final Visual Test page. See Fig 6.11.

6.11.7 Attach a File into a Final Visual Test Report

If you want to attach any file with any final visual test report listed in the Final Visual Test page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.11.8 Edit Any Final Visual Test Report

If you want to edit any existing final visual test report in the Final Visual Test page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective final visual test report. See Fig 6.11.

   A new window opens to edit the final visual test report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.11.9 Export Final Visual Test Report List

You can export a list of final visual test reports added in the Final Visual Test page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.11.10 Filter Any Final Visual Test Report

If you want to filter any visual test report from the list of in the Final Visual Test page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

6.12 Machining Report

The Machining Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a machining report once the machining process has completed. If you want to add a machining report, do the following,

1. Click the Machining Report Tab.

   The Machining page opens.

   

                                                         Figure 6.12: Machining page

6.12.1 Add a Machining Report

If you want to add a machining report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Machining page. See Fig 6.12.

   A new window opens to add a machining report.

   

    Tip: A report number for a new machining report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

    

2. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

3. Click Save.

The machining report is successfully added.

6.12.2 Add Machining Report Details

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Machining page. See Fig 6.12.

   The Machining Report Details window opens.

   

2. Click (ADD button) in the Machining Report Details window.

   A new window opens in the Drawing No column.

   

3. In the Drawing No column, select the drawing number from a drop-down list.

4. In the Piece Mark No column, click and select the piece mark number from a drop-down list.

5. In the Description column, click and enter the description.

6. In the Material Grade column, click and enter the material grade.

7. In the Hole Before Line Boring (mm)column, enter the size of a hole made before line boring.

8. In the Hole After Line Boring (mm) column, enter the size of a hole made after line boring.

9. In the Deviation column, enter the deviation between holes.

10. In the Inspection Date column, select the inspection date.

11. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any.

12. Click Save.

The added machining report details will be updated.

6.12.3 Submit and Approve a Machining Report

Once you have added the machining report details, the Submission column in the Machining page is appeared with (Submit and Reject icons).

1. If you want to submit the machining report, click  (Submit icon) in the Submission Otherwise click (Reject icon) to reject the request.

   Once you have submitted the machining report, the Request Status column in the Machining page is appeared with 

   (Accept and Reject icons).

2. If you want to approve the machining report, click (Submit icon) in the Request Status column. Otherwise click 

    (Reject icon) to reject the request.

3. If you have completed the machining report, click (Completed icon) in the Completed Status column. If incomplete, click  (Incomplete icon).

6.12.4 Print a Machining Report

If you want to print a machining report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Machining page. See Fig 6.12.

6.12.5 Attach a File into a Machining Report

If you want to attach any file with any machining report listed in the Machining page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.12.6 Edit Any Machining Report

If you want to edit any existing machining report in the Machining page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective machining report. See Fig 6.12.

   A new window opens to edit the machining report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.12.7 Export Machining Report List

You can export a list of machining reports added in the Machining page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.12.8 Filter any machining report

If you want to filter any machining report from the list in the Machining page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

6.13 Load Test Report

The Load Test Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a load test report once the load test has completed. If you want to add a load test report, do the following,

1. Click the Load Test Report Tab.

   The Load Test Report page opens. 

   

                                           Figure 6.13: Load Test Report page

6.13.1 Add a Load Test Report

If you want to add a load test report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.13.

   A new window opens to add a load test report.

   

    Tip: A report number for a new load test report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

    

2. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the load test report.

3. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the load test report.

4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the load test report.

5. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the load test report.

6. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the load test report.

7. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the load test report.

8.  Click Save.

The load test report is successfully added. Once you have added the load test report, you must add the details for the added report.

6.13.2 Add Load Test Report Details 

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Load Test Report See Fig 6.14.

   The Load Test Parameters, Equipment Details, and Report Photos windows open in the Load Test Report page.

   

2. If you want to add the load test parameters in the Load Test Parameters window, do the following,

   1. 1. 1. In the Load Test Pressure Required box, enter the required range of load test pressure.

         2. In the Test Load box, enter the test load detail.

         3. In the Test Duration box, enter the load test time duration.

         4. In the Pressure Gauge Reading box, enter the pressure gauge reading value.

         5. In the Hydraulic Jack System S/N box, enter the hydraulic jack system detail.

         6. In the Pull up Jack Capacity box, enter the value of pull up jack capacity.

         7. In the Document Procedure No box, select the document procedure number from a drop-down list.

         8. In the Description of Items box, enter the item description.

         9. In the Reference Drawing box, enter the reference drawing detail.

         10. In the Client Reference Drawing No box, enter the client reference drawing number.

         11. In the Load Test Pressure Requirement box, enter the requirement for load test pressure.

         12. In the Actual Pressure Requirement box, enter the requirement for actual pressure.

         13. In the Holding Time box, enter the holding time duration.

         14. In the Result box, select the result from a drop-down list.

         15. Click Save.

3. If you want to add the equipment details in the Equipment Details window, do the following,
   1. 1. 1. Click (ADD button) in the Equipment Details window.

            A new window opens to add the equipment details.

            

         2. In the Conducted By box, select Internal if the load test is conducted internally or select External if the load test is conducted externally. 

         3.  

            In the Equipment Details box, select the equipment from a drop-down list.

         4.  

            Click Save. 

4.  If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following,

   1. 1. 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window.

            

         2. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

         3. Click Upload.

            The selected photo will be updated.

6.13.3 Print a Load Test Report

If you want to print a load test report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.13.

 Tip: If you want to lock any load test report, click the check box provided in the Lock Report? column of the Load Test Report page. See Fig 6.13.

6.13.4 Attach a File into a Load Test Report

If you want to attach any file with any load test report listed in the Load Test Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.13.5 Edit Any Load Test Report

If you want to edit any existing load test report in the Load Test Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective load test report. See Fig 6.13.

   A new window opens to edit the load test report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.
3. Click Save.

6.13.6 Export Load Test Report List

You can export a list of load test reports added in the Load Test Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.14 Survey Booking

Survey Booking is an enhanced survey booking process, which helps the surveyors to manage their survey requirements more efficiently with respect to time and scope.

The Survey Booking tab in the Structural menu helps in adding a survey booking once the survey booking process has completed.

If you want to add a survey booking, do the following,

1. Click the Survey Booking Tab.

   The Survey Booking page opens.

   

                                                   Figure 6.14: Survey Booking page

6.14.1 Add a Survey Booking

If you want to add a survey booking,

1. Click   (ADD button) in the Survey Booking page. See Fig 6.15.

   A new window opens to add a survey booking.

   

2. In the Surveyor box, enter the name of a surveyor.

3. In the Survey Date box, select the survey date from a drop-down list.

4. In the Authority box, enter the name of authority person.

5. In the Client Rep box, enter the name of the client representative.

6. In the Location box, enter the location where the survey to be performed.

7. Click Save.

The survey booking is successfully added.

6.14.2 Add Survey Booking Details

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Survey Booking See Fig 6.14.

   The Survey Booking Details window opens.

   

2. Click  (ADD button) in the Survey Booking Details window.

   A new window opens to add the survey booking details.

   

3.  In the Time box, select the survey time.

4. In the Description box, enter the description for the survey booking.

5. In the Trade box, enter the trade detail.
6. In the Type box, enter the type of survey.
7. In the QC Code box, enter the QC code.
8. In the Location box, enter the location where the survey is to be performed.
9. In the Drawing No box, select the drawing number from a drop-down list.
10. In the For CTR box, enter the CTR detail.
11. In the For RG/ CA box, enter the RG/ CA detail.
12. In the Requested By box, enter the name of a person who has requested for the survey booking.
13. In the For CPY box, enter the CPY detail.

14. In the Sub Contractor box, select the sub-contractor name from a drop-down list.

15. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any.

16. Click Save.

The survey booking details will be updated.

6.14.3 Print a Survey Booking Report

If you want to print a survey booking report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Survey Booking page. See Fig 6.14.

6.14.4 Attach a File into a Survey Booking

If you want to attach any file with any survey booking listed in the Survey Booking page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.14.5 Edit Any Survey Booking

If you want to edit any existing survey booking in the Survey Booking page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective survey booking. See Fig 6.14.

   A new window opens to edit the survey booking.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.14.6 Export Survey Booking List

You can export a list of survey booking added in the Survey Booking page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.14.7 Filter Any Survey Booking

If you want to filter any survey booking from the list in the Survey Booking page, you can use the  (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

6.15 Dimensional Control Report

Dimensional control used to determine part-to-part variation and clearance between two parts of material. By applying Dimensional Control, accurate three-dimensional information can be determined and mapped at various stages throughout the Structural project.

The Dimensional Control Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a dimensional control report once the dimensional control has completed. If you want to add a dimensional control report, do the following,

1. Click the Dimensional Control Report Tab.

   The Dimensional Control Report page opens.

   

                                        Figure 6.15: Dimensional Control Report page

6.15.1 Add a dimensional control report

If you want to add a dimensional control report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Dimensional Control Report See Fig 6.15.

   A new window opens to add a dimensional control report.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    Tip: A report number for a new dimensional control report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Drawing box, select the drawing from a drop-down list.

3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the dimensional control report.

4. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the dimensional control report.

5. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the dimensional control report.

6. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the dimensional control report.

7. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the dimensional control report.

8. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the dimensional control report.

9.  Click Save.

The dimensional control report is successfully added. Once you have added the dimensional control report, you must add the details for the added dimensional control report.

6.15.2 Add Dimensional Control Report Details 

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Dimensional Control Report See Fig 6.15.

   The Dimensional Control Parameters, Dimensional Control Details, and Report Photos windows open in the Dimensional Control Report page.

   

   

    Tip: If you want to add any notes for dimensional control report, you can add in the Notes window provided in the Dimensional Control Report page.

2. If you want to add the dimensional control parameters in the Dimensional Control Parameters window, do the following,

   1. 1. 1. In the Date of Survey box, enter the survey date.

         2.  In the Time box, enter the survey time.

         3.  In the Weather box, enter the weather details.

         4.  In the Temp C box, enter the temperature control value.

         5. In the Location box, enter the location where the dimensional control is to be performed

         6.  In the Instrument box, select the instrument from a drop-down list.

         7.  In the Description box, enter the description for dimensional control.

         8.  In the Status box, enter the status for dimensional control.

         9.  Click Save.

3. If you want to add the dimensional control details in the Dimensional Control Details window, do the following,

   1. 1. 1. Click (ADD button) in the Dimensional Control Details window.

            Boxes opens in the respective columns to add the dimensional control details.

            

             Tip: You can add multiple dimensional control result details by using the ADD button. If you want to order the added details, use the up and down symbols in the Order By column.

             
         2.  In the Symbol/ Description column, enter the symbol or description for the dimensional control. 

         3. In the Drawing column, enter the drawing detail.

         4. In the Tolerance column, enter the tolerance value.

         5. In the Actual column, enter the actual value.

         6. In the Result column, enter the result for the dimensional control.

         7. In the Remarks column, enter your remarks if any.  

         8. Click Save Changes.

4. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following,

   1. 1. 1. Click (ADD button) in the Report Photos window.

            

         2. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

         3. Click Upload.

            The selected photo will be updated.

6.15.3 Print a Dimensional Control Report

If you want to print a dimensional control report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Dimensional Control Report page. See Fig 6.15.

6.15.4 Attach a File into a Dimensional Control Report

If you want to attach any file with any dimensional control report listed in the Dimensional Control Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.15.5 Edit Any Dimensional Control Report

If you want to edit any existing dimensional control report in the Dimensional Control Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective dimensional control report. See Fig 6.15.

   A new window opens to edit the dimensional control report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.15.6 Export Dimensional Control Report List

You can export a list of dimensional control reports added in the Dimensional Control Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.16 Trail Fit Report

Trail Fit report prepared to send the trail fit-up photos once the trail fit-up has completed. The Trail Fit Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a trail fit report. If you want to add a trail fit report, do the following,

1. Click Trail Fit Report in the Structural menu. The Trail Fit Report page opens.

   

                                                     Figure 6.16: Trail Fit Report page

6.16.1 Add a Trail Fit Report

If you want to add a trail fit report,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Trail Fit Report page. See Fig 6.16.

   A new window opens to add a trail fit report.

   

    Tip: A report number for a new trail fit report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the trail fit report.

3. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the trail fit report.

4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the trail fit report.

5. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the trail fit report.

6. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the trail fit report.

7. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the trail fit report.

8.  Click Save.

The trail fit report is successfully added. Once you have added the trail fit report, you must add the trail fit details for the added trail fit report.

6.16.2 Add Trail Fit Report Details 

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Trail Fit Report See Fig 6.16.

   The Report Photos window opens in the Trail Fit Report page.

   

    Tip: If you want to add any remarks for trail fit report, you can add in the Remarks window provided in the Trail Fit Report page.

2. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following,

   1. 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window.

         

      2. Click   (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

      3. Click Upload.

         The selected photo will be updated.

6.16.3 Print a Trail Fit Report

If you want to print a trail fit report, click  (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Trail Fit Report page. See Fig 6.16.

Tip: If you want to lock any trail fit report, click the check box provided in the Lock Report? column of the Trail Fit Report page. See Fig 6.16.

6.16.4 Attach a File into a Trail Fit Report

If you want to attach any file with any trail fit report listed in the Trail Fit Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.16.5 Edit Any Trail Fit Report

If you want to edit any existing trail fit report in the Trial Fit Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective trail fit report. See Fig 3.16.

   A new window opens to edit the trail fit report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.16.6 Export Trail Fit Report List

You can export a list of trail fit reports added in the Trail Fit Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.17 Heat Straightening Report

Heat straightening is a repair procedure in which controlled heat is applied in specific patterns to the plastically deformed regions of damaged material in repetitive heating and cooling cycles to gradually straighten the material.

The Heat Straightening Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a heat straightening report once the heat straightening process has completed. If you want to add a heat straightening report, do the following,

1. Click the Heat Straightening Report Tab.

   The Heat Straightening Report page opens.

   

                                       Figure 6.17: Heat Straightening Report page

6.17.1 Add a Heat Straightening Report

If you want to add a heat straightening report,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Heat Straightening Report See Fig 6.17.

   A new window opens to add a heat straightening report.

   

    Tip: A report number for a new heat straightening report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box. 

2.  In the Description box, enter the description for the heat straightening report.

3. In the Description box, enter the description for the heat straightening report.

4. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the heat straightening report.

5. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the heat straightening report.

6. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the heat straightening report.

7. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the heat straightening report.

8.  In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the heat straightening

9.  Click Save.

The heat straightening report is successfully added. Once you have added the heat straightening report, you must add the heat straightening details for the added report.

6.17.2 Add Heat Straightening Details 

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Heat Straightening Report page. See Fig 6.17.

   The Report Parameters and Report Photos windows open in the Heat Straightening Report page.

   

    
2. If you want to add the report parameters in the Report Parameters window, do the following,

   1. 1. Click (ADD button) in the Report Parameters window.

      2. In the Description box, enter the description for heat straightening.

      3. In the Size box, enter the thickness of the material.

      4. In the Start Time box, enter the start time of heat straightening.

      5. In the End Time box, enter the end time of heat straightening.

      6. In the Temperature box, enter the temperature range for heat straightening.

      7. In the Length box, enter the length of material to do heat straightening.

      8. In the Heating Speed box, enter the heating speed of heat straightening.

      9. In the Cycle box, enter the detail of heat straightening cycle.

      10. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

      11. Click Save.

3. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following,

   1. 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window.

         

      2. Click  (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

      3. Click Upload.

         The selected photo will be updated.

6.17.3 Print a Heat Straightening Report

If you want to print a heat straightening report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Heat Straightening Report page. See Fig 6.17.

6.17.4 Attach a File into a Heat Straightening Report

If you want to attach any file with any heat straightening report listed in the Heat Straightening Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.17.5 Edit Any Heat Straightening Report

If you want to edit any existing heat straightening report in the Heat Straightening Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective heat straightening report. See Fig 6.17.

   A new window opens to edit the heat straightening report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.17.6 Export Heat Straightening Report List 

You can export a list of heat straightening reports added in the Heat Straightening Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.18 Inspection Release Note

Inspection Release Note is a written announcement which is issued by QC contractor to denote the successful completion of the inspection.

The Inspection Release Note tab in the Structural menu used to add an inspection release note after completion of the inspection. If you want to add an inspection release note, do the following,

1. Click the Inspection Release Note Tab.

   The Release Form page opens.

   

                                               Figure 6.18: Release Form page

6.18.1 Add an Inspection Release Note

If you want to add an inspection release note,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Release Form page. See Fig 6.18.

   A new window opens to add an inspection release note.

   

   Tip: A report number for a new inspection release note will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Activity box, select the activity from a drop-down list.

3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the inspection release note.

4. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the inspection release note.

5. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the inspection release note.

6. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the inspection release note.

7. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the inspection release note.

8. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the inspection release note.

9.  Click Save.

The inspection release note is successfully added. Once you have added the inspection release note, you must add the details for the added note.

6.18.2 Add Inspection Release Note Details 

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Release Form See Fig 6.18.

   The Release Form Parameters, Details, and Report Photos windows open in the Release Form page.

   

2. If you want to add the release form parameters in the Release Form Parameters window, do the following,

   1. 1. In the Test Package No box, enter the test package number.

      2. In the Tag ID box, enter the tag ID number.

      3. In the Activity box, enter the activity detail.

      4. In the Comments box, enter any comments relevant to the inspection release note.

      5.  Click Save.

3. If you want to add the release note details in the Details window, do the following,

   1. 1. Click (ADD button) in the Details window.

         A new window opens to add the release note details.

         

      2. In the Description box, enter the description for the inspection release note. 

      3.  If the company’s QC contractor issues the inspection release note, select the check box provided with the QC Contractor/ Company and select the date in the respective Date box.

      4.  If the company’s QC contractor issues the inspection release note, select the check box provided with the QC Contractor/ Company and select the date in the respective Date box.

      5.  Click Save.

4. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following,

   1. 1. Click   (ADD button) in the Report Photos window.

         

      2.  Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

      3. Click Upload.

The selected photo will be updated.

6.18.3 Print an Inspection Release Form Report

If you want to print an inspection release form report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Release Form page. See Fig 6.18.

Tip: If you want to lock any inspection release note, click the check box provided in the Lock Report? column of the Release Form page. See Fig 6.18.

6.18.4 Attach a File into an Inspection Release Note

If you want to attach any file with any inspection release note listed in the Release Form page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.18.5 Edit Any Inspection Release Note

If you want to edit any existing inspection release note in the Release Form page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective inspection release note. See Fig 6.18.

   A new window opens to edit the inspection release note.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.18.6 Export Inspection Release Note List

You can export a list of inspection release notes added in the Release Form page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.19 Shell Plate Rolling Report

Shell Plate Rolling is a process of rolling different kinds of metal plates into a round or conical shape by using a plate rolling machine in the Structural project.

The Shell Plate Rolling Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a shell plate rolling report once the shell plate rolling process has completed. If you want to add a shell plate rolling report, do the following,

1. Click the Shell Plate Rolling Report Tab.

   The Shell Plate Rolling Report page opens.

   

                                        Figure 6.19: Shell Plate Rolling Report page.

    

6.19.1 Add a Shell Plate Rolling Report

If you want to add a shell plate rolling report,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Shell Plate Rolling Report See Fig 6.19.

   A new window opens to add a shell plate rolling report.

   

   Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    Tip: A report number for a new shell plate rolling report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Drawing box, select the drawing from a drop-down list.

3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the shell plate rolling report.

4. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the shell plate rolling report.

5. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the shell plate rolling report.

6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the shell plate rolling report.

7. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the shell plate rolling report.
8. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the shell plate rolling report.

9. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the shell plate rolling report.

10.  Click Save.

The shell plate rolling report is successfully added. Once you have added the shell plate rolling report, you must add the details for the added report.

6.19.2 Add Shell Plate Rolling Report Details 

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Shell Plate Rolling Report page. See Fig 6.19.

   The Shell Plate Rolling Details and Report Photos windows open in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page.

   

   Tip: If you want to add any notes for the shell plate rolling report, you can add in the Notes window provided in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page.

    

2. If you want to add the shell plate rolling details in the Shell Plate Rolling Details window, do the following,
   1. 1. 1. Click (ADD button) in the Shell Plate Rolling Details window.

            Boxes opens in the respective columns to add the shell plate rolling details.

            

         2. In the PLATE HEAT NO column, enter the heat number of the plate. 

         3. In the DATE column, select the date when the shell plate rolling process is performed.

         4. In the (S) EXTREME CURVATURE column, enter the extreme curvature value for the respective A SIDE and B SIDE of the rolling plate.

         5. In the (R) CURVATURE column, enter the radius curvature value of the rolling plate.

         6. In the LENGTH column, enter the length of C SIDE and D SIDE of the rolling plate.

         7. In the EDGE- PREPARATION column, enter the root and angle values for A, B, C, and D SIDES, respectively.

         8. Click Save Changes.

3. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following,

   1. 1. 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos window.

            

         2. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

         3. Click Upload.

            The selected photo will be updated.

6.19.3 Print a Shell Plate Rolling Report

If you want to print a shell plate rolling report, click(print icon) provided in the Report column of the Shell Plate Rolling Report page. See Fig 6.19.

6.19.4 Attach a File into a Shell Plate Rolling Report

If you want to attach any file with any shell plate rolling report listed in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.19.5 Edit Any Shell Plate Rolling Report

If you want to edit any existing shell plate rolling report in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page, do the following,

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective shell plate rolling report. See Fig 6.19.

   A new window opens to edit the shell plate rolling report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.19.6 Export Shell Plate Rolling Report List

You can export a list of shell plate rolling reports added in the Shell Plate Rolling Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.20 Deviation Request Report

Deviation Report used to find out any deviations in the materials utilized in the Structural project. The Deviation Request Report tab in the Structural menu helps you to add a deviation request report.

If you want to add a deviation request report, do the following,

1. Click the Deviation Request Report Tab.

   The Deviation Request Report page opens.

   

                                      Figure 6.20: Deviation Request Report page

6.20.1 Add a Deviation Request Report 

If you want to add a deviation request report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Deviation Request Report  See Fig 6.20.

   A new window opens to add a deviation request report.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new deviation request report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2.  In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date of the deviation request report.
3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the deviation request report.

4. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the deviation request report.

5. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the deviation request report.

6. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the deviation request report.

7. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the deviation request report.

8. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the deviation request report.

9.  Click Save.

The deviation request report is successfully added. Once you have added the deviation request report, you must add the details for the added deviation request.

Tip: If you want to add a copy of added deviation request report, click Revision in the Revision column of the Deviation Request Report page.

6.20.2 Add Deviation Request Details 

1. Click  (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Deviation Request Report  See Fig 6.20.

   The Material Clarification, Ref. Documents, Query Description, Attachments, Proposed Solutions, and Technip Response windows open in the Deviation Request Report page.

   

   

   

   

2. To add the material clarification details, do the following,

   1. 1. 1. In the From and To boxes, enter details of deviation occurred up to which material.
         2. In the Impact box, if the deviation leads to the cost impact then select Cost Impact or if the deviation leads to the schedule impact then select Schedule Impact.
         3. In the Criticality box, if there is need to correct the deviation in the materials immediately then select Urgent otherwise select Routine based on the deviation criticality.

         4. In the Classification box, if the classification of deviation is mandatory then select Mandatory otherwise select Non- Mandatory.

         5. In the Requirements box, if you need clarification for the deviations occurred then select Clarification otherwise select Change to Project Requirement.

         6. Click Save.

3. To add reference documents of the material deviations,

   1. 1. 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Documents window.

            A new window opens in the Technip Document No column to add the reference document number.

         2. Enter the revision detail for the reference document number in the Revision column.

         3. Enter the vendor document number in the Vendor Document No column.

         4. Enter the revision detail for the vendor document number in the Revision column.

         5. Click Save Changes.

4. If you want to add query description, you can add in the Query Description window.

5. To add any attachment for the deviation request report,

   1. 1. 1. Click   (ADD button) in the Attachments window.

            A new window opens in the Document No column to add the number of a document to be attached.

         2.  Enter the revision detail for the document number in the Revision column.

         3. Enter the title of the document in the Title column.

         4. Click Save Changes.

6. If you want to add the proposed solution details for the material deviation, you can add in the Proposed Solutions window.

7. If you want to add the proposed solution details for the material deviation, you can add in the Proposed Solutions window.

6.20.3 Print a Deviation Request Report

If you want to print a deviation request report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Deviation Request Report page. See Fig 6.20.

6.20.4 Attach a File into a Deviation Request Report

If you want to attach any file with any deviation request report listed in the Deviation Request Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.20.5 Edit Any Deviation Request Report

If you want to edit any existing deviation request report in the Deviation Request Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective deviation request report. See Fig 6.20.

   A new window opens to edit the deviation request report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.20.6 Export Deviation Request Report List

You can export a list of deviation request reports added in the Deviation Request Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.21 Technical Query Report

Technical query usually raised to get clarification on technical fault, which is occurred in the execution of the Structural project. The Technical query can be raised between site operations of the contractor and engineering team of the contractor.

The Technical Query Report tab in the Structural menu used to add a technical query report. If you want to add a technical query report, do the following,

1. Click the Technical Query Report Tab.

   The Technical Query Report page opens.

   

                                              Figure 6.21: Technical Query Report page

6.21.1 Add a Technical Query Report 

If you want to add a technical query report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Technical Query Report page. See Fig 6.21.

   A new window opens to add a technical query report.

   

    Note: The fields notified with a symbol (*) are mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

   Tip: A report number for a new technical query report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Inspection Date box, select the inspection date of the technical query report.

3. In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the technical query report.

4.  In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the technical query report.
5. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the technical query report.
6. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the technical query report.

7. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the technical query report.

8. In the Approved Date box, enter the approved date of the deviation request report.
9. Click Save.

The technical query report is successfully added. Once you have added the technical query report, you must add the details for the added report.

Tip: If you want to add a copy of added technical query report, click Revision in the Revision column of the Technical Query Report page.

6.21.2 Add Technical Query Report Details 

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Technical Query Report  See Fig 6.21.

   The Material Clarification, Ref. Documents, Query Description, Attachments, Proposed Solutions, and Technip Response windows open in the Technical Query Report page.

   

   

2. To add the material clarification details, do the following,

   1. 1. 1. In the From and To boxes, enter details of technical fault.

         2. In the Impact box, if the technical fault leads to the cost impact then select Cost Impact or if the technical fault leads to the schedule impact then select Schedule Impact.
         3. In the Impact box, if the technical fault leads to the cost impact then select Cost Impact or if the technical fault leads to the schedule impact then select Schedule Impact.
         4. In the Criticality box, if there is need to correct the technical fault immediately then select Urgent otherwise select Routine based on the technical fault criticality.
         5. In the Classification box, if the classification of technical fault is mandatory then select Mandatory otherwise select Non- Mandatory.
         6. In the Requirements box, if you need clarification for the technical fault occurred then select Clarification otherwise select Change to Project Requirement.

         7. Click Save.

3. To add reference documents of the technical fault,

   1. 1. 1. Click   (ADD button) in the Ref. Documents window.

            A new window opens in the Technip Document No column to add the reference document number.

         2. Enter the revision detail for the reference document number in the Revision column.

         3. Enter the vendor document number in the Vendor Document No column.

         4. Enter the revision detail for the vendor document number in the Revision column.

         5. Click Save Changes.

4. If you want to add query description for technical fault, you can add in the Query Description window.

5. To add any attachment for the technical query report,

   1. 1. Click   (ADD button) in the Attachments window.

         A new window opens in the Document No column to add the number of a document to be attached.

      2.  Enter the revision detail for the document number in the Revision column.

      3. Enter the title of the document in the Title column.

      4. Click Save Changes.

6. If you want to add the proposed solution details for the technical fault, you can add in the Proposed Solutions window.

7. If you want to add the Technip response for the technical fault, you can add in the Technip Response window.

6.21.3 Print a Technical Query Report

If you want to print a technical query report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Technical Query Report page. See Fig 6.22.

6.21.4 Attach a File into a Technical Query Report

If you want to attach any file with any technical query report listed in the Technical Query Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.21.5 Edit Any Technical Query Report

If you want to edit any existing technical query report in the Technical Query Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective technical query report. See Fig 6.21.

   A new window opens to edit the technical query report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.21.6 Export Technical Query Report List

You can export a list of technical query reports added in the Technical Query Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.22 Electrical Continuity Report

Electrical continuity test is a technique to check and verify the current flow in the metal paths. The Electrical Continuity Report tab in the Structural menu used to add an electrical continuity report after the completion of electrical continuity test.

If you want to add an electrical continuity report, do the following,

1. Click the Electrical Continuity Report Tab.

   The Electrical Continuity Report page opens.

   

                                     Figure 6.22: Electrical Continuity Report page

6.22.1 Add an Electrical Continuity Report

If you want to add an electrical continuity report,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Electrical Continuity Report See Fig 6.22.

   A new window opens to add an electrical continuity report.

   

    Tip: A report number for a new electrical continuity report will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2.  In the Prepared By box, enter the name a person who has prepared the electrical continuity report.

3. In the Prepared Date box, enter the prepared date of the electrical continuity report.

4. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name a person who has reviewed the electrical continuity report.

5. In the Reviewed Date box, enter the reviewed date of the electrical continuity report.

6. In the Approved By box, enter the name a person who has approved the electrical continuity report.

7. In the Approved Dat ebox, enter the approved date of the electrical continuity report.

8.  Click Save.

The electrical continuity report is successfully added. Once you have added the electrical continuity report, you must add the details for the added report.

6.22.2 Add Electrical Continuity Report Details 

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit Report column of the Electrical Continuity Report See Fig 6.22.

   The Electrical Continuity Parameters, Electrical Continuity, and Report Photos windows open in the Electrical Continuity Report page.

   

    Tip: If you want to add any notes for the electrical continuity report, you can add in the Notes window provided in the Electrical Continuity Report page.

2. If you want to add the electrical continuity parameters in the Electrical Continuity Parameters window, do the following,
   1. 1. 1. In the Item Measured box, enter the number of items, which are measured for electrical continuity.

         2. In the Procedure No box, enter the electrical continuity procedure number.

         3. Click Save.

3. If you want to add the electrical continuity details in the Electrical Continuity window, do the following,
   1. 1. 1. Click  (ADD button) in the Electrical Continuity window.

            Boxes opens in the respective columns to add the electrical continuity details.

            

         2. In the Location Test column, enter the location test detail. 

         3. In the Reading column, enter the electrical continuity reading values for the respective Reading 1 and Reading 2.
         4. In the Average Reading 1 and 2columns, enter the average reading value.

         5. In the Specification Requirement column, enter the specification requirement detail.

         6. In the Result column, enter the result of the electrical continuity test.

         7. In the Remarks column, enter you remarks if any.

         8. Click Save Changes.

4. If you want to add the report photos in the Report Photos window, do the following,

   1. 1. 1. Click   (ADD button) in the Report Photos window.

            

         2. Click (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

         3. Click Upload.

            The selected photo will be updated.

6.22.3 Print an Electrical Continuity Report

If you want to print an electrical continuity report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column of the Electrical Continuity Report page. See Fig 6.22.

6.22.4 Attach a File into an Electrical Continuity Report

If you want to attach any file with any electrical continuity report listed in the Electrical Continuity Report page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.22.5 Edit Any Electrical Continuity Report

If you want to edit any existing electrical continuity report in the Electrical Continuity Report page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective electrical continuity report. See Fig 6.22.

   A new window opens to edit the electrical continuity report.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.22.6 Export Electrical Continuity Report List

You can export a list of electrical continuity reports added in the Electrical Continuity Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.23 Joint Summary Report

The Joint Summary report tab in the Structural menu used to view a joint summary report. If you want to see a joint summary report,

1. Click the Joint Summary Report tab.

   A list of joint summary reports opens.

   

                                          Figure 6.23: Joint Summary Report page

    Tip: If you want to view a joint summary report for all projects, click the check box provided with the All Projects option.

6.23.1 Export Joint Summary Report List

You can export a list of joint summary reports in the Joint Summary Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.24 Joint Status Report (Skid)

The Joint Status Report (Skid) tab in the Structural menu helps you to view a joint status report (Skid) based on an inspection status report.

If you want to view a joint status report (Skid),

1. Click the Joint Status Report (Skid) tab.

   A joint status report (Skid) opens.

   

                                           Figure 6.24: Joint Status Report (Skid) page

6.24.1 Print a Joint Status Report (Skid)

If you want to print a joint status report (Skid), use and  (print icons) provided in the Joint Status Report (Skid) page. See Fig 6.24.

1. If you want to print the current page of the joint status report (Skid), click (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the joint status report (Skid), click (print icon).

6.24.2 Export Joint Status Report (Skid) List

You can export a joint status report (Skid) in the Joint Status Report (Skid) page in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Joint Status Report (Skid) page.

6.25 Joint Status Report (Project)

The Joint Status Report (Project) tab in the Structural menu helps you to view a joint status report (project) depends on the project type.

If you want to view a joint status report (project),

1. Click the Joint Status Report (Project) tab.

   A joint status report (project) opens.

   

                                             Figure 9.25: Joint Status Report (Project) page

2. In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view a joint status report (project), from a drop-down list.

   A joint status report (project) opens for the selected project.  

6.25.1 Print a Joint Status Report (Project)

If you want to print a joint status report (project), use and   (print icons) provided in the Joint Status Report (Project) page. See Fig 6.25.

1. If you want to print the current page of the joint status report (project), click  (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the joint status report (project), click (print icon).

6.25.2 Export Joint Status Report (Project) List

You can export a joint status report (project) in the Joint Status Report (Project) page in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Joint Status Report (Project) page.

6.26 Joint Status Report (Weekly)

The Joint Status Report (Weekly) tab in the Structural menu helps you to view a joint status report (Weekly) on a weekly basis.

If you want to view a joint status report (Weekly),

1. Click the Joint Status Report (Weekly) tab.

   A joint status report (Weekly) opens.

   

                                              Figure 6.26: Joint Status Report (Weekly) page

2. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively.

3. Click Go.

   A joint status report (Weekly) opens for the selected dates.  

6.26.1 Print a Joint Status Report (Weekly)

If you want to print a joint status report (Weekly), use  and  (print icons) provided in the Joint Status Report (Weekly) page. See Fig 6.26.

1. If you want to print the current page of the joint status report (Weekly), click (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the joint status report (Weekly), click (print icon).

6.26.2 Export Joint Status Report (Weekly) List

You can export a joint status report (Weekly) in the Joint Status Report (Weekly) page in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Joint Status Report (Weekly) page.

6.27 Inspection Status Report

Inspection Status Report shows the overall inspection reports such as from fit-up inspection status to NDT inspection status.

If you want to view an inspection status report, do the following,

1. Click the Inspection Status Report tab.

   The Inspection Status Report page opens.

   

   

   

   

                                        Figure 6.27: Inspection Status Report page

   The Inspection Status Report page contains joint information, RFI fit-up, RFI weld VI, and NDT inspection status.

2. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively.

3. Click Search.

   The inspection status report opens for the selected dates.

    Tip: If you want to view the inspection status report including the weld and NDT inspection date, click the check box provided with the Weld Date/ NDT Date option.

6.27.1 Print an Inspection Status Report 

If you want to print an inspection status report, use (print icon) provided in the Inspection Status Report page. See Fig 6.27.

6.27.2 Export Inspection Status Report List

You can export a list of inspection status report in the inspection Status Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.28 Weld Traceability Record

The Weld Traceability Record tab in the Structural menu used to add and track a weld traceability record.

If you want add a weld traceability record, do the following,

1. Click the Weld Traceability Record tab.

   The Weld Traceability Record page opens.

   

                                                Figure 6.28: Weld Traceability Record page

6.28.1 Add a Weld Traceability Record

If you want to add a weld traceability record, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the Weld Traceability Record page. See Fig 6.28.

   A new window opens to add a weld traceability record.

   

    Note: The field notified with a symbol (*) is mandatory. You must enter the relevant details in that fields before saving.

    Tip: A report number for a new weld traceability record will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Drawing Number box, select a drawing number from a drop-down list.

3. In the Date box, enter the date of adding the weld traceability record.

4. In the Prepared By box, enter the name of a person who has prepared the weld traceability record.

5. In the Prepared Date box, select the prepared date of the weld traceability record.
6. In the Reviewed By box, enter the name of a person who has reviewed the weld traceability record.

7. In the Reviewed Date box, select the reviewed date of the weld traceability record.

8. In the Approved By boxes, enter the name of a person who has approved the weld traceability record.

9. In the Approved Date box, select the approved date of the weld traceability record.

10. If you want to display Not Applicable (NA) in any field instead of leaving as an empty one, select the Is NA? check box.

11. In the Remarks box, enter your remarks if any.

12. In the Comments box, enter your comments if any.

13. Click Save.

    The weld traceability record is successfully added.

6.28.2 Print a Weld Traceability Report

If you want to print a weld traceability report, click (print icon) provided in the Report column in the Weld Traceability Record page. See Fig 6.28.

6.28.3 Attach a File into a Weld Traceability Record

If you want to attach any file with the weld traceability record listed in the Weld Traceability Record page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

6.28.4 Edit Any Weld Traceability Record 

 If you want to edit any existing weld traceability record in the Weld Traceability Record page, do the following,

1. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective weld traceability record. See Fig 6.28.

   A new window opens to edit the weld traceability record.

2. Click any box where you want to edit the details, and then edit the details in the respective box.

3. Click Save.

6.28.5 Export Weld Traceability Record List

You can export a list of weld traceability record added in the Weld Traceability Record page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

6.28.6 Filter Any Weld Traceability Record

If you want to filter any weld traceability record from the list in the Weld Traceability Record page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

6.29 Weld Rejection Rate

In Structural project, Weld Rejection Rate is the difference between the tested length and repair length of the welded material, which are calculated using RT and UT inspection. The Weld Rejection Rate is used to calculate the weld success rate.

The Weld Rejection Rate tab in the Structural menu shows a weld rejection rate report including weekly and cumulative weld success rate summary details.

If you want to view a weld rejection rate report,

1. Click the Weld Rejection Rate tab.

   The weld rejection rate report page opens.

   

                                               Figure 9.29: Weld Rejection Rate Report page

       

2. In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view a weld rejection rate report, from a drop-down list.

3. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively.

4. Click Show Report.

   The weld rejection rate report opens for the selected project.  

6.29.1 Print a Weld Rejection Rate Report

If you want to print a weld rejection rate report, use and  (print icons) provided in the Weld Rejection Rate Report page. See Fig 6.29.

1. If you want to print the current page of the weld rejection rate report, click (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the weld rejection rate report, click  (print icon).

6.29.2 Export Weld Rejection Rate Report 

You can export the weld rejection rate report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Rejection Rate Report page.

6.30 Weld Rejection Rate (MPI)

In Structural project, Weld Rejection Rate (MPI) is the difference between the tested length of and repair length of the Complete Joint Penetration (CJP) and Fillet welding materials, which are calculated using MPI inspection. The Weld Rejection Rate is used to calculate the weld success rate.

The Weld Rejection Rate (MPI) tab in the Structural menu shows a weld rejection rate report including weekly and cumulative weld success rate summary details.

If you want to view a weld rejection rate report,

1. Click the Weld Rejection Rate (MPI) tab.

   The Weld Rejection Rate Report page opens.

   

2. In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view a weld rejection rate report, from a drop-down list.

3. In the Report Type box, select the report type from a drop-down list.

4. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively.

5. Click Show Report.

   The weld rejection rate report opens for the selected project.  

6.30.1 Print a Weld Rejection Rate Report

If you want to print a weld rejection rate report, use and (print icons) provided in the Weld Rejection Rate Report page. See Fig 6.30.

1. If you want to print the current page of the weld rejection rate report, click (print icon including the page number).
2. If you want to print all the pages of the weld rejection rate report, click (print icon).

6.30.2 Export Weld Rejection Rate Report 

You can export the weld rejection rate report in various formats by using the option   provided in the upper right corner of the Weld Rejection Rate Report page.

6.31 Inspection Progress Status Report

The Inspection Progress Status Report tab in the Structural menu helps you to view an inspection progress status report depends on the project type.

If you want to view an inspection progress status report,

1. Click the Inspection Progress Status Report tab.

   The inspection progress status report page opens.

   

                                       Figure 6.31: Inspection Progress Status Report page

2.  In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view an inspection progress status report, from a drop-down list.

3. Click Show Report.

   The inspection progress status report opens for the selected project.  

6.31.1 Print an Inspection Progress Status Report

If you want to print an inspection progress status report, use and (print icons) provided in the Inspection Progress Status Report page. See Fig 6.31.

1. If you want to print the current page of the inspection progress status report, click (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the inspection progress status report, click  (print icon).

6.31.2 Export Inspection Progress Status Report 

You can export the inspection progress status report in the Inspection Progress Status Report page in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Inspection Progress Status Report page.

6.32 Welder Performance Report

Welder performance report used to view the welder performance details. If you want to view a welder performance report, do the following,

1. Click the Welder Performance tab.

   The Welder Performance Report page opens.

   

                                            Figure 6.32: Welder Performance Report page

2. In the Project box, select a project for which you want to view a welder performance report, from a drop-down list.

3. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively.

4. In the Joint type box, select the joint type from a drop-down list.

5. Click Load Report.

The welder performance report opens for the selected project.  

6.32.1 Print a Welder Performance Report

If you want to print a welder performance report, use and (print icons) provided in the Welder Performance Report page. See Fig 6.32.

1. If you want to print the current page of the welder performance report, click (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the welder performance report, click (print icon).

6.32.2 Export Welder Performance Report 

You can export the welder performance report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Welder Performance Report page.

6.33 Welder Statistic Report

Welder Statistics Report shows the statistical data of the welders. If you want to view a welder statistics report, do the following,

1. Click the Welder Statistic Report tab in the Structural meu.

   The Welder Statistic Report page opens.

   

                                                Figure 9.33: Welder Statistic Report page

2. In the From Date and To Date boxes, select the from and to dates in respectively.

3. Click Load Report.

The welder statistic report opens for the selected dates.  

6.33.1 Print a Welder Statistic Report

If you want to print a welder statistic report, use and  (print icons) provided in the Welder Statistic Report page. See Fig 6.33.

1. If you want to print the current page of the welder statistic report, click  (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the welder statistic report, click (print icon).

6.33.2 Export Welder Statistic Report

You can export the welder statistic report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the Welder Statistic Report page.

6.34 Joint Summary Report (Detailed)

Joint Summary Report (Detailed) used to track the detailed weld joints summary.  Do the following steps to view a joint summary report,

1. Click the Joint Summary Report (Detailed) tab. The Welding Summary Report page opens.

   

   

                                    Figure 6.34: Welding Summary Report page

6.34.1 Edit Joint Details

If you want to edit the joint details in the welding summary details,

1. Click the respective joint number in the Joint No column of the Welding Summary Report page.

   The Joint Details window opens

   

2. Click (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective joint numbers of the columns where you want to make changes in the thickness of the weld joint, piece mark number, and heat number.

3. Edit the details in the respective columns.

4. Click Save.

6.34.2 Print a Welding Summary Report

If you want to print a welding summary report, use (print icon) provided in the Welding Summary Report page. See Fig 6.35.

6.34.3 Export Welding Summary Report List

You can export a list of welding summary reports added in the Welding Summary Report page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

Punch Lists

7.0 Punch Lists

A punch list is a list of items or tasks that need to be done before a project is completed. The Punch Lists menu in the home page of the cuteQM app helps to create and view the punch lists in Structural project.

7.1 Create a New Punch List

If you want to create a punch list, do the following,

1. Click the Create New Punch List in the Punch lists menu. The Create Punch page opens.

   

                                                         Figure 7.1: Create Punch page

2. In the Modules box, select any module from the given modules.

3. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Sub-Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list.

5. In the ITR No box, enter the ITR number.

6. In the Drawing No box, enter the drawing number.

7. In the Test Pack box, select a test pack from a drop-down list.

8. In the Tag No box, enter the tag number.

9. In the Reference Types box, select the reference type from the given options.

10. In the Select Project box, select a project from a drop-down list.

11. In the Category box, select any category from the given categories such as A, B, and C.

    A - Item to be cleared before hydrostatic test. B - Item to be cleared after hydrostatic test. C - Item which can be cleared after hydrostatic test but before final acceptance of the whole plant.

     

12. In the Type box, select the type of punch such as whether internal or external.

13. In the Item box, enter the item details.

14. In the Location box, select a location from a drop-down list.

15. In the Description/ Punch box, enter the description for the punch list.

16. In the Punch Raised From box, select the detail such as from where the punch has been raised.

17. In the Date Raised box, select the date when the punch has been raised.

18. In the Punch Raised By box, enter the name of a person who has raised the punch.

19. In the Responsible Dept box, enter the department name, which is responsible for the punch.

20. In the Responsible Person box, enter the name of a person who is responsible for the punch.

21. In the Expected Clearance box, select the expected date of clearing the punch list.

22. Click Save.

The punch list is successfully added.

7.1.11 Add report photos

If you want to add any report photos for the punch list,

1. Click  (ADD button) in the Report Photos box.

   

2. Click   (Browse button) to browse a photo stored in your computer.

3. Click Upload.

   The selected photo will be updated.

7.2 View Punch Lists

The View Punch Lists tab helps you to view and edit the punch list, which is added by using the Create New Punch List tab.

1. Click the View Punch Lists tab in the Punch Lists menu.

   The Punch List page opens with added punch lists.  

   

                                                   Figure 7.2: Punch List page

   Note: If you want to verify the added punch list item, click the check box provided in the Verify column.

                    If you want to clear the added punch list item, click the check box provided in the Clear column.

7.2.1 Print a Punch List Report

If you want to print a punch list report, click  (Print button) provided in the upper side of the Punch List page. See Fig 7.2.

7.2.2 Attach a File into a Punch List

If you want to attach any file with any punch list listed in the Punch List page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

7.2.3 Edit Any Punch List

If you want to edit any existing punch list in the Punch List page, click  (Edit icon) in the Edit column for the respective punch list. See Fig 7.2. Edit the details in the respective box you want.

7.2.4 Export Punch Lists

You can export the punch lists added in the Punch List page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

7.2.5 Filter Any Punch List

If you want to filter any punch list in the Punch List page, you can use the (FILTER button). To know how to filter, see the topic, ”Filter Any Area”.

7.3 Punch List Detail Report

The Punch List Detail Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a detailed report of the punch lists. To view the punch list detail report,

1. Click Punch List Detail Report in the Punch Lists menu.

   The Punch List Detail Report page opens.

   

                                                Figure 7.3: Punch List Detail Report page

2.  In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules.

3. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list.

5. In the ITR No box, enter the ITR number.

6. In the Drawing box, enter the drawing number.

7. In the Category box, select a category from a list.

8. In the Status box, select a status from a drop-down list.

9. In the Punch Raised From box, select a person who has raised the punch list.

10. In the Responsible Party box, select a responsible party from a drop-down list.

11. In the Test Pack box, select a test pack from a drop-down list.

12. In the Tag No box, enter the tag number.

13. In the Raised Date box, select a raised date of the punch list.

    The punch list report opens based on the selected data.

7.3.1 Print Punch List Detail Report

If you want to print the punch list detail report, use and (print icons) provided in the Punch List Detail Report page.

• If you want to print the current page of the punch list detail report, click (print icon including the page number).
• If you want to print all the pages of the punch list detail report, click (print icon).

7.3.2 View Punch List Detail Report 

You can view the punch list detail report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list detail report page.

7.4 Punch List System Report

The Punch List System Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a punch list system report. To view the punch list system report,

1. Click Punch List System Report in the Punch Lists menu.

   The Punch List System Report page opens.

   

                                                  Figure 7.4: Punch List System Report page

2.  In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules.

3. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list.

   The punch list system report opens based on the selected data.

7.4.1 Print Punch List System Report

If you want to print the punch list system report, use and  (print icons) provided in the Punch List system Report page.

1. If you want to print the current page of the punch list system report, click (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the punch list system report, click (print icon).

7.4.2 View Punch List System Report 

You can view the punch list system report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list system report page.

7.5 Punch List Sub System Report

The Punch List Sub System Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a punch list sub system report. To view the punch list sub system report,

1. Click Punch List Sub System Report in the Punch Lists menu.

   The Punch List Sub System Report page opens.

   

                                           Figure 7.5: Punch List Sub System Report page

2. In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules.

3. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list.

   The punch list sub system report opens based on the selected data.

7.5.1 Print Punch List Sub System Report

If you want to print the punch list sub system report, use and (print icons) provided in the Punch List Sub System Report page.

1. If you want to print the current page of the punch list sub system report, click (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the punch list sub system report, click (print icon).

7.5.2 View Punch List Sub System Report 

You can view the punch list sub system report in various formats by using the option provided in the upper right corner of the punch list sub system report page.

7.6 Punch List Category Report

The Punch List Category Report tab in the Punch Lists menu helps you to view a punch list category report. To view the punch list category report,

1. Click Punch List Category Report in the Punch Lists menu.

   The Punch List Category Report page opens.

   

                                             Figure 7.6: Punch List Category Report page

2. In the Modules field, select Piping from the given modules.

3. In the Systems box, select a system from a drop-down list.

4. In the Sub Systems box, select a sub-system from a drop-down list.

   The punch list category report opens based on the selected data.

7.6.1 Print Punch List Category Report

If you want to print the punch list category report, use and (print icons) provided in the Punch List Category Report page.

1. If you want to print the current page of the punch list category report, click (print icon including the page number).

2. If you want to print all the pages of the punch list category report, click  (print icon).

7.6.2 View Punch List Category Report 

You can view the punch list category report in various formats by using the option  provided in the upper right corner of the punch list category report page.

Non-Conformance Report (NCR)

8.0 Non-Conformance Report (NCR) 

NCR used to document the details of a non-conformance identified in a quality audit or other process review. The NCR menu helps to add an NCR in the Structural project. Once you click the NCR menu, the following tabs open,

8.1 Add NCR

The Add NCR tab in the NCR menu used to add an NCR. Do the following steps to add an NCR,

1. Click the Add NCR tab.

   The NCR page opens.  

   

   

   

   

   

                                                                    Figure 8.1: NCR page

    Tip: A report number for a new NCR will be updated automatically in the Report Number box.

2. In the Type box, select the type of non-conformance from a drop-down list.

3. In the Classification box, select whether minor classification or major classification from a drop-down list.

4. In the Source/ Item box, select the source of NCR from a drop-down list.

5. To add controlling/ reference documents,

   

   1. 1. 1. Click   (ADD button) in the Controlling/ Reference documents box.

            A new window opens in the Doc No column.

         2. Enter the document number in the new window of the Doc No column.

         3. Enter the description for the document in a box of the Description of document column.

         4. Enter the section reference number in a box of the Section ref No column.

         5. Click Save.

6. In the NCR box, enter the description for the identified deficiency of the selected non-conformance type.

7. In the Reference Document box, enter the reference document detail.

8. In the Owner Reference Document box, enter the owner reference document detail.

9. In the Supplier Reference Document box, enter the supplier reference document detail.

10. In the NCR originator box, enter the originator of NCR.

11. In the Origin Date box, select the origin date of NCR.

12. In the NCR Accepted By box, enter the name of a person who has accepted the NCR.

13. In the NCR Accepted Date box, select the NCR accepted date.

14. In the Agreed Closure Date box, select the agreed closure date.

15. In the Issued By box, select the company who has issued the NCR.

16. In the Issued To box, select the company for which the NCR has issued.

17. In the Root Cause box, enter the root cause detail.

18.  If you want to add the corrective action detail, do the following,

    1. 1. 1. In the Action box, select any corrective action from the given options.

          2. In the Corrective Action box, enter the corrective action detail.

          3. In the Proposed by box, enter the name of a person who has proposed the corrective action.

          4. In the Target Close-out Date box, select the target close out date.  

          5. In the Preventive Action box, enter the preventive actions.

          6. In the Probability box, select the probability percentage of non-conformance.

          7. In the consequences box, select the consequences level you have faced.

19. If you want to add any remarks, click Remarks option and enter your remarks, otherwise click No Remarks option.
20. In the Verification box, enter the verification detail on completion of corrective action/ preventive action.

21. In the Inspected by QC Inspector, and Date boxes, enter the name of the QC inspector who has inspected the NCR, and date, respectively.

22. In the Verified and NCR closed by, and Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has verified and closed the NCR, and date, respectively.

23. In the Supplier NCR Close out by, and Close Out Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has closed the supplier NCR, and close out date, respectively.
24. In the Owner NCR Close out by, and Close Out Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has closed the owner NCR, and close out date, respectively.
25. In the Approval Req box, if you need approval, click Yes, otherwise click NO.
26. If you have selected Yes, you must enter the reference detail in the If Yes, Then Reference

27. In the Description box, enter the description of proposal.

28. In the Proposal Accepted by, and Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has accepted the proposal, and date, respectively.

29. In the NCR Close Notes box, enter the NCR close notes.

30. In the Disposition Completed by, and Date boxes, enter the name of a person who has completed the disposition, and date, respectively.

31. Click Save.

The NCR is successfully added.

8.2 View NCR

The View NCR tab helps you to add, view, and edit the NCR, which is added by using the Add NCR tab.

1. Click the View NCR tab in the NCR menu.

   The View NCR page opens with added NCR.

   

                                                Figure 8.2: View NCR page

8.2.1 Add an NCR

If you want to add an NCR, do the following,

1. Click (ADD button) in the View NCR page.

   The View NCR page redirects you into the NCR page. Follow the same procedure in the topic, “Add NCR” to add an NCR.

8.2.2 Print an NCR

If you want to print an NCR, click (Print button) provided in the upper side of the View NCR page. See Fig 8.2.

8.2.3 Attach a File into an NCR 

If you want to attach any file with any NCR listed in the View NCR page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

8.2.4 Update Any NCR

If you want to update any existing NCR in the View NCR page, click (Update icon) in the Update column for the respective NCR. See Fig 8.2. Edit the details in the respective box you want.

8.2.5 Export NCR

You can export the NCR added in the View NCR page in the pdf and excel formats. To know how to export, see the topic, “Export Areas list” in the Area option.

8.2.6 Delete NCR

If you want to delete any NCR in the View NCR page, click (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the View NCR page, See Fig 8.2.

Documentation

9.0 Documentation

The Documentation menu used to combine the number of files, which are attached to every menu of this cuteQM app. The combined files will be shown as a pdf file. This menu also used to attach a new file to a module that is not provided with an attachment option to attach any file.

9.1 Document Upload

The Document Upload tab in the Documentation menu used to upload documents for various process.

1. Click Document Upload in the Documentation menu.

   The Upload Documents page opens.

   

                                                Figure 9.1: Upload Documents page

2. Select a file which you want to upload by click Select a file for upload.

   The selected file will be added in the File Upload window.  

9.2 Manufacture Data Report (MDR) Settings

The MDR Settings tab in the Documentation menu helps you to do page setup for the pdf file which will be shown after combining the attached files.

1. Click the MDR Settings tab.

   The MDR Settings page opens.

   

                                                             Figure 9.2: MDR Settings page

2. In the Page Numbering box, select the page numbering option that is whether Section wise or Continuous.

3. In the Page Number (Digits) box, select the page number displaying format from a drop-down list.

4. If you want to append the section number with the page number, click Yes, otherwise click No in the Append Section number with Page number box.

5. In the Page Number Template box, select the page number template from a drop-down list.

6. If you want to add the starting page numbers from TOC, click Yes, otherwise click No in the Page Number Starting From TOC ?

7. If you want to add alphabet page numbers, click Yes, otherwise click No in the Alphabet Page number? box.

8. In the Logo box, attach your logo by using (Browse button).

9. Click Save.

9.3 Document Category

The Document Category tab in the Documentation menu used to attach a file to any module that is not provided with an attachment option to attach any file. Before attaching a file for any module, you must add the relevant category name of the module.

9.3.1 Add a Document Category

1. Click the Document Category tab.

   The Document Category page opens.

   

                                                Figure 9.3: Document Category page

2.  Click  (ADD button) in the Document Category page.

   A new window opens to add a document category.

   

3.  In the Category Name box, enter the relevant category name for the module for which you want to attach a file.

4. In the Description box, enter the description for the added category.

5. Click Save.

   (OR)

6. If you want to import any document category from another vessel, Click Import from Another Vessel.

   The Import from Another Vessel window opens.

   

   
   

   1. 1. 1. In the Equipment box, select an equipment from a drop-down list.

         2. Click Save.

The added category name will be listed in the Document Category page. Once you have added the document category, you can attach any file to the added category.

9.3.2 Attach a File into an Added Document Category

If you want to attach any file with the added category listed in the Document Category page, follow the procedures given in the topic “Attach a file into a client master drawing” in the Client Master Drawing section.

9.3.3 Edit Any Document Category

If you want to edit any existing category in the Document Category page, click (Edit icon) for the respective category, and then edit the details in the respective box.

9.3.4 Delete Any Document Category

If you want to delete any specific added category from the list, you can use  (Delete icon) provided in the Delete column of the Document Category page, See Fig 9.3.

9.4 One Click Documentation

The One Click Documentation tab used to combine the attached file of the various module.   

1. Click the One Click Documentation tab.

   The One Click Documentation page opens.

   

                                                 Figure 9.4: One Click Documentation page

   The One Click Documentation page shows a list of reports name of each module including the attachment file counts. This page also shows the list of document categories including their attachments, which are added using the Document Category tab.  

    Note: If you want to edit any existing category in the Document Category page, click (Edit icon) for the respective category, and then edit the details in the respective box.

2. Click the check box of the respective reports which you want to combine.

3. Click Generate MDR.

   The system combines the selected files and shows as the pdf file in the left side of the One Click Documentation page, See Fig 9.4.

   Tip: You can view the pdf file by clicking the respective pdf file. The file will be opened including the data in the combined files.